30+ Turkish Recipes Perfect For Beginners - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/international-recipes/turkish-cuisine/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Sat, 18 Nov 2023 21:04:44 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png 30+ Turkish Recipes Perfect For Beginners - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/international-recipes/turkish-cuisine/ 32 32 Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away. Hummus Ingredients A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the...

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, grilled lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is hummus?

Hummus originated in the Middle East, but many countries have welcomed and adapted it to their own. Such variations include Israeli, Lebanese, Palestine, Egyptian, and Greek hummus.

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 13
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste. If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally...

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Shish Tawook https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/ https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:46:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67581 What is Shish Tawook and Where Does It Come From? Also referred to as “chicken tawook” and “shish taouk”, Shish tawook is a traditional Turkish dish made by threading marinated chicken on skewers and cooking them over a grill. Unsurprisingly, the word “shish” translates to “skewer,” while the word “tawook” means “chicken” in Turkish. Together, the name means “chicken threaded on a skewer.” This recipe’s classic meat marinade—a mixture of...

The post Shish Tawook appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Shish Tawook and Where Does It Come From?

Also referred to as “chicken tawook” and “shish taouk”, Shish tawook is a traditional Turkish dish made by threading marinated chicken on skewers and cooking them over a grill. Unsurprisingly, the word “shish” translates to “skewer,” while the word “tawook” means “chicken” in Turkish. Together, the name means “chicken threaded on a skewer.”

This recipe’s classic meat marinade—a mixture of yogurt, tomato paste, and spices—dates back to the Ottoman Empire, which ruled much of the Middle East from the 1300s to the 1900s. Since its inception, this recipe has been claimed by many countries in and around the Middle East, including Turkey, Lebanon, and Egypt.

Chicken tawook placed on a bed of tabbouleh served by a person from the top view.

Though popular in its countries of origin, shish tawook has made a considerable mark on American culture—becoming a popular dish in Mediterranean, Lebanese, and Middle Eastern fast food restaurants in the US. 

List of Ingredients

This shish tawook recipe comes together with two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for chicken shish tawook from the top view.
  1. Shish tawook marinade: To make this Middle Eastern chicken marinade, you will need:
    • Greek yogurt: I like the thick creamy texture of full-fat Greek yogurt, but you can also use plain yogurt.
    • Lemon zest and freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh garlic cloves 
    • Tomato paste: This is mostly for color than flavor and can be omitted if preferred. 
    • Seasonings: You will need warm spices like ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, and basic seasonings like kosher salt and black pepper. Optionally, you can also add in a pinch of cayenne pepper for some heat.
  2. Chicken: You can use boneless skinless chicken thighs or boneless skinless chicken breasts for this shish chicken kebab recipe. Regardless of which one you use, it is important to make sure they are cut in equal sizes.

In terms of equipment, you will need either metal or wooden skewers to thread your kabobs.

How to Make Shish Taouk?

The recipe for shish taouk makes authentic Middle Eastern cuisine easy for cooks at any level. Follow the instructions below for a juicy chicken dish that is guaranteed to impress:

A collage of images showing how to make shish tawook recipe.
  1. Prep the chicken: Remove any residual skin and fat from your chicken, then slice it into one-inch chunks. Transfer your sliced chicken cubes into a large bowl, and set it aside.
  2. Make the yogurt marinade: In a mixing bowl, mix yogurt, fresh lemon juice, lemon zest, olive oil, garlic, ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, tomato paste, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until the ingredients thoroughly blend.
  3. Add the chicken: Pour the marinade over the chicken and toss the mixture until each piece of chicken has an even coating of marinade. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap and remove as much air as possible. Transfer the meat to the fridge and marinate the chicken for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight.
  4. Prepare the skewers: If you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, soak them in water for 30 minutes before assembling the chicken kebabs. 
Person showing how to cook lebanese chicken kabobs in a collage of images.
  1. Preheat the grill: Set the burners to medium-high, and let it preheat for 10 minutes or until it reaches 400 degrees F. Use tongs to dip a wad of paper towel into the olive oil and thoroughly wipe the grates.
  2. Assemble the skewers: Thread the meat through the skewers, tapping off any excess marinade. If you have any thin pieces, fold them before threading to ensure even cooking. Do not overcrowd the meat as you thread the skewers. Leaving a little room between each piece will help each chicken piece cook evenly.
  3. Cook: Place the chicken skewers onto the oiled grate in a single, even layer. Cover the grill and cook for 12-15 minutes, rotating the skewers every five minutes. This rotation will evenly brown your meat and give the dish its signature grill marks. Check doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) in a few of the chicken pieces. They are fully cooked if they reached 165 degrees F.
Person covering freshly cooked Middle eastern grilled chicken with foil.
  1. Rest and serve: Place a sheet of aluminum foil loosely over the grilled chicken skewers and let it rest for 10 minutes. Serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Chicken shish tawook is a godsend for easy meal prep and leftover storage. Whether you make it for a weeknight meal or a summer party, you won’t let a single bite go to waste with these helpful tips:

  • Make ahead: The best part about Middle Eastern marinated chicken is that its flavor deepens the longer it sits. You can marinate your chicken for up to 24 hours before cooking. Then, assemble your chicken kabobs and grill them as written in the recipe below.
  • Storage: When done eating, let your chicken reach room temperature. Then, remove the meat from the skewers and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat the leftover shish chicken kabobs using three different methods:
    • In the oven: Place your leftovers on a sheet pan and warm them in a preheated 325 degrees F. oven for 10-15 minutes.
    • On the stovetop: Heat your chicken in a skillet with a bit of oil over medium-high heat until heated through. 
    • In the microwave: For a super-quick reheating method, place your leftovers in a microwave-safe container and microwave them for 1-2 minutes—checking every 30 seconds—until warm. If your meat is too dry, add a splash of water to the container before heating.

What to Serve with Shish Tawook?

You won’t believe how many menus you can design around this Middle Eastern Grilled Chicken recipe. This collection has everything to help you create a feast in your own kitchen:

Chicken tawook sandwich served with tzatziki in a lavash bread.
  • Make it a sandwich or wrap: Nothing hits the spot better than a shish tawook sandwich. Simply remove your grilled chicken from its skewers, lightly grill a slice of pita bread or lavash, spread a sauce on top, and add your chicken. In Turkey, I’ve seen people make a chicken tawook wrap by spreading the pita with creamy hummus, then topping it with cooked chicken, sliced tomatoes, and red onions (or sumac onions for a zestier taste). Then, it is drizzled with a yogurt-based sauce such as yogurt dill sauce or tahini yogurt sauce
  • Turn it into Lebanese chicken kabobs: Want to make it as they do in Lebanese restaurants? Spread your lavash (or pita bread) with Lebanese garlic sauce, toum, and then place the shish tawook on top along with lettuce, pickles, and tomatoes. If you have never made this Lebanese recipe, this homemade toum garlic sauce recipe is my favorite one. 
  • Serve over rice or tabbouleh: Whip up a pot of simple rice for an easy weeknight fix. Or, for a more traditional pairing, serve this Middle Eastern chicken skewers recipe alongside Turkish Tabbouleh or Tabbouleh with Quinoa with a helping of cool tzatziki on the side.
  • Simple salad on the side: Packed with protein and herby flavor, this chicken kebab recipe balances perfectly with a garden-fresh salad. Prepare an authentic Middle Eastern menu with a Turkish White Bean Salad or Fattoush Salad. You can also add tasty, crisp flavors to your table with my Yogurt Coleslaw or any of my other delicious summer salads.

Expert Tips

This five-star Middle Eastern meal is pretty straightforward and quite easy to make. Below are a few helpful tips to help you make the best chicken shish tawook on your first try:

  • Don’t skimp on the marination: Sufficient marination is the key to the tender, juicy chicken in this recipe. Like my Yogurt Chicken Marinade, the yogurt and lemon juice in this recipe’s marinade tenderizes the meat and infuses it with rich, tangy flavors. To ensure your chicken comes out as juicy as possible, I recommend letting it sit for at least 4 hours— up to 24 hours—before cooking.
  • Cut the chicken into equal sizes: Be sure to slice your chicken into even, one-inch chunks before threading them on the skewers. Evenly-sized chicken cubes will allow each skewer to cook at the same rate.
  • Thread loosely: Thread your tender chicken chunks loosely on their skewers to avoid crowding and uneven cooking. I also recommend leaving 1-2 inches on the ends of your skewers so you can easily remove the chicken pieces from the skewers.
  • Oil the grates: To avoid sticking and burnt meat, thoroughly oil your grill grates before cooking your shish taouk. Furthermore, once you add the chicken skewers to the grates, turn them a few times to ensure even cooking.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to check your shish tawook’s doneness is to insert a digital meat thermometer into the center of a piece of chicken. USDA recommends cooking chicken until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. before serving.
  • Let the chicken rest: Once you remove the chicken skewers from the grill, let it rest under a sheet of aluminum foil for 5-10 minutes before serving.
  • Don’t have a grill?: If you don’t have access to an outdoor grill, you can use an indoor grill pan to prepare your chicken shish tawook on the stovetop. You can also make a slightly different version of this recipe in the oven using my recipe for Oven-Baked Chicken Kabobs.
  • Add vegetables to the skewers: The authentic shish tawook recipe is not made with vegetables. However, if you prefer, you can use quick-cooking vegetables such as onions, mushrooms, and green bell peppers as you thread the chicken.

FAQS

What is the difference between chicken shawarma and tawook?

The difference in shish taouk vs. shawarma lies in marination and cooking. Though both dishes originate in the Middle East, chicken shawarma doesn’t usually include yogurt in its marinade, resulting in a deeper flavor profile. Also, shawarma comes from slow-cooking stacks of spiced chicken slices on a vertical rotisserie and slicing off the outer layer.

What is the difference between chicken mishwi and chicken tawook?

To identify chicken mishwi vs. tawook, you’ll want to look at the method of assembly and cooking process. Chicken mishwi refers to chicken grilled on charcoal, whereas shish tawook is made by cooking cubed chicken on skewers.

What is the difference between shish kebab and shish tawook?

Though both refer to dishes cooked on a skewer, shish kebabs can include any meat, including beef, chicken, or seafood. Shish kabobs may also have veggies, like bell pepper or onions, for extra freshness and fiber. Meanwhile, shish tawook refers to skewered kebabs made with marinated chicken.

Can shish kabobs be cooked in the oven?

Yes! To cook shish tawouk in the oven, line a sheet pan with parchment paper and arrange your marinated chicken pieces. Bake the meat for 15-20 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping halfway through. Finish the cooking process by broiling the chicken for one minute on each side, up to two minutes in total.

How can I turn this into a chicken maroosh recipe?

Popularized by a Philadelphia-based restaurant, chicken maroosh is a version of shish tawook served on a hoagie roll rather than on pita or lavash. Top your hoagie with charred onions, tomatoes, pickles, and garlic sauce for an authentic maroosh recipe.

What are some other names used to describe this recipe in Middle Eastern restaurants?

Nowadays, people in the U.S. refer to this dish in dozens of different ways, including “sheesh tawook”, “chicken taouk”, and “shistaouk.” I’ve even heard it marketed as “Chickabob” in some Lebanese restaurants in the US.

Other Middle Eastern Recipes You Might Also Like

If you love this shish taouk recipe, I have dozens of other classic recipes for you to try. You won’t be able to resist these fan-favorite dishes’ mouthwatering Middle Eastern flavors.

If you try this Shish Tawook recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Shish tawook placed on a bed of tabbouleh and served with yogurt sauce.
Print

Shish Tawook Recipe

Experience authentic Shish Tawook, tender, juicy Middle Eastern chicken skewers grilled to perfection. Marinated in yogurt, garlic, lemon, and spices, this grilled chicken recipe is simple yet bold and flavorful.
Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 30 minutes
Servings 9 skewers
Calories 181kcal

Ingredients

Chicken

  • 2 pounds boneless and skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts, cut into 1-inch cubes

For The Marinade

  • ¾ cup whole milk Greek yogurt or plain yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil plus more for the grill
  • 6 garlic cloves minced
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional

Instructions

  • Prepare the chicken: Remove any residual skin or fat from the chicken; pat dry and transfer the chicken pieces to a bowl and set aside.
  • Prepare the marinade: In a mixing bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon zest, lemon juice, olive oil, garlic, ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, tomato paste, salt, and pepper so that all are incorporated.
  • Pour the marinade over the chicken and mix well, ensuring all the chicken pieces are thoroughly coated. Cover it tightly with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible. Place it in the fridge and marinate for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight.
  • If using wooden skewers, begin soaking them in water for 30 minutes prior to assembling the marinated chicken. Remove the marinating chicken from the fridge 20 minutes before grilling.
  • When ready to grill*, turn burners to medium-high and let them preheat for 10 minutes or until it reaches 400 degrees F. Using tongs, dip a wad of paper towel into the extra olive oil and then generously wipe the grates*.
  • Meanwhile, remove the chicken from the marinade and thread the chicken pieces through the skewer. Tap off any excess marinade. If you have a thin piece, fold it as you thread it so it will cook evenly. Do not pack the pieces too tight, as this can lead to uneven cooking.
  • Place the skewers on the oiled grate in a single layer. Cover and cook for approximately 12-15 minutes, rotating every 5 minutes so that you achieve a nice browning with grill marks. If you have a meat thermometer, check doneness by inserting it into one of the chicken skewers. If the internal temperature reached to 165 degrees F., your shish tawook should be cooked.
  • Remove the skewered chicken from the grill and tent with aluminum foil for at least 10 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 8-9 skewers of shish tawook with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The nutritional information below is per skewer.
  • Cook on the stove top*: If you do not have a grill, you can cook your skewers in a grill pan on the stove. It takes about 15-20 minutes to cook them on the stove.
  • Do not skip the oiling of the grill grates: This is an important step to ensure that the chicken releases easily (and in one piece) when cooked. If you skip this step (or do not oil them well) the chicken skewers will stick to the grates and it will be difficult to flip them.
  • Make ahead: You can marinate your chicken for up to 24 hours before cooking. When ready, assemble and cook them as directed in the recipe.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature. Then, remove the meat from the skewers and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheating: To heat in the oven, place your leftovers on a sheet pan and warm them in a preheated 325 degrees F. oven for 10-15 minutes. And to warm it up on the stovetop, place your chicken in a skillet (or a grill pan) with a bit of oil over medium-high heat and cook until heated through. 
  • Serving suggestions: These chicken skewers can be served with cooked grains, summer salads, or in lavash bread. I served them over a bed of tabbouleh and with a side of tzatziki.

Nutrition

Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 97mg | Sodium: 383mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 196IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Shish Tawook appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/feed/ 2
Chicken Kabobs in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:42:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67579 Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite protein among many, these baked chicken skewers make the perfect meal with fresh zesty marinade, succulent meat, and easy cleanup. Even better, when you give this delicious recipe a quick broil at the very end, your chicken kabobs will taste very similar to its grilled version. Ingredients You’ll Need to...

The post Chicken Kabobs in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite protein among many, these baked chicken skewers make the perfect meal with fresh zesty marinade, succulent meat, and easy cleanup. Even better, when you give this delicious recipe a quick broil at the very end, your chicken kabobs will taste very similar to its grilled version.

Baked chicken kabobs served with rice and pita on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Baked Chicken Skewers

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make oven-cooked chicken kabobs:

Ingredients for chicken shish kabob in oven from the top view.
  • Marinade: The seasoning for chicken shish kabobs is inspired by my Mediterranean
    seasoning
    . You’ll need the following:
    • Olive oil
    • Lemon zest and fresh lemon juice
    • Spices and herbs: Dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper.
  • Chicken: You will need two pounds of boneless, skinless chicken breasts or chicken thighs sliced into one-inch chunks.
  • Vegetables: It is optional, but you can easily turn these into chicken vegetable kabobs by including veggies such as red onions, green bell peppers, and yellow peppers.

In terms of equipment, you’ll need metal, bamboo, or wooden skewers to assemble the kabobs.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

  • Marinade: If you prefer a tangier, creamier taste, you can use my Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Or, if you’d like to make an Asian-inspired meal, you can opt for my soy sauce-based chicken teriyaki marinade instead.
  • Vegetables: The best part of cooking chicken skewers in the oven is playing around with what fresh veggies to use. In addition to onions and peppers, I recommend using quick-cooking vegetables such as button mushrooms, baby bella mushrooms, zucchini, or cherry tomatoes. 
  • Spices: Feel free to get creative by adding your favorite spices to the marinade. Earthy and flavorful spices like ground cumin and smoked paprika pair beautifully with the rest of the marinade ingredients.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of chopped fresh parsley or dill is an easy way to give these oven-roasted chicken skewers a gourmet finish.

How to Cook Chicken Shish Kabobs in the Oven?

Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is a quick and tasty way to enjoy five-star Mediterranean fare all year round. No grill, no problem! Simply follow the instructions below:

A collage of images showing how to bake chicken kabobs in oven.
  1. Prepare the chicken kabob marinade: In a large bowl (one that is big enough to accommodate all the chicken pieces), whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Set it aside.
  2. Dry and cut the chicken: Dry chicken breasts using a sheet of paper towel on both sides. First, cut them into strips and then each strip into 1-inch cubes. 
  3. Marinade: Add the cubed chicken to the bowl of marinade, and toss to ensure each piece of chicken receives an even coating. Cover the bowl of chicken with plastic wrap. Press down on the layer to remove any air, and seal the bowl tightly. Place the meat in the fridge for at least one hour or for up to 12 hours.
  4. Soak the skewers: If you are using wooden skewers, soak them in water 30 minutes before cooking.
  5. Remove the chicken: 20 minutes before assembly, take the marinated chicken out of the fridge.
  6. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 450 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set the prepared sheet pan aside.
A collage of images showing how to make skewered chicken in oven.
  1. Assemble the kabobs: Loosely thread the pieces of chicken on each skewer, discarding any excess liquid. If desired, alternate the chicken chunks with onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken.
  2. Place the kabobs on the sheet pan: Arrange the assembled kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet, ensuring not to crowd the skewers. 
  3. Bake the chicken kabobs: Place the skewered chicken in the oven and bake for 16 minutes, flipping it halfway through baking. When rotating the chicken kabobs, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to rotate the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones. 
  4. Broil: Switch the oven to the broil setting and cook the chicken kabobs for one minute on each side, not exceeding a total of two minutes. Check for doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) into the center of one of the chicken chunks. When the meat reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees F., remove the kabobs from the oven.
  5. Rest and serve: Loosely cover the oven-roasted kabobs with a sheet of aluminum foil, and let them rest for 5-10 minutes. Once the resting process finishes, serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Oven-baked chicken kabobs are excellent for anyone who enjoys easy meal prep. Prepare these kabobs, and simple meals will be ready throughout the week.

  • Make ahead: To transform this chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, prepare your chicken marinade up to two days in advance. Store the chicken and marinade in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble your chicken kabobs when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your baked shish kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. You can also reheat your chicken kabobs in the microwave for 1-1½ minutes (checking every 30 seconds), until they are warmed thoroughly.

What to Serve with Baked Chicken Kebabs?

When you bake chicken skewers, you’ll unlock countless delectable menus fit for a restaurant. This simple collection has everything to satisfy your table, from savory grains to crisp salads. 

  • Rice and grains: Jasmine rice is a simple classic, while other seasoned options—such as my Herbed Quinoa, Simple Wild Rice Pilaf, and Tabbouleh—perfectly capture the herby, hearty taste of a Mediterranean menu.
  • Pasta: Tender, filling, and simple, orzo is one of my favorite sides to prepare when I bake kabobs in the oven. Looking for a richer, more decadent pairing? Buttery Garlic Pasta is the ultimate crowd-pleaser for sophisticated pasta sides.
  • Yogurt Sauce: Nothing complements baked chicken shish kabobs like a creamy, tangy, and irresistibly rich dipping sauce. My authentic Tzatziki is a classic pairing, while my Dill Yogurt Sauce is a quicker alternative that you can put together in 5 minutes.
  • Salads: If you want a delicious, low-carb pairing, any of my easy quinoa salad recipes will do the trick. Or, if you’re looking for a simple green salad, my Spring Mix Salad and Caprese Pasta Salad only require a handful of pantry-ready ingredients for a garden-fresh side.
Baked chicken skewers in a sheet pan from the top view.

Expert Tips

Cooking chicken kabobs in the oven is an easy way to prepare Instagram-ready meals all week. With these simple tips, your chicken will always come out perfectly juicy and flavorful.

  • Don’t skimp on the marinade time: Thorough marination is the key to giving this baked shish kabob recipe its robust, herbaceous taste. I recommend a minimum of an hour or up to twelve hours for maximum flavor.
  • Soak the skewers: I prefer metal skewers because they heat up quickly, resulting in evenly cooked chicken pieces. However, if you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, be sure to soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before assembling your chicken kabobs to prevent them from burning while cooking.
  • Thread the skewers loosely: When assembling your chicken kabobs, thread them loosely and leave room at both ends so you have something to hold onto while eating. I also recommend shaking off any excess liquid to avoid creating a liquid bath in the baking tray. Finally, discard any extra marinade, as its contact with raw chicken will introduce unwanted bacteria to the mixture.
  • Flip halfway through the baking process: Flipping your baked kebabs will ensure they cook evenly on both sides of the meat. 
  • Finish under the broiler: Keep a close eye on your chicken kabobs while they finish under the broiler. Broilers cook very quickly, and over-cooking your chicken skewers may result in burnt or dry meat. If you’re not a fan of using a broiler, bake your chicken kabobs for an extra five minutes instead. Though, keep in mind that broiled chicken tastes very similar to its grilled version.
  • Uniform-sized chicken: It is important to cut the chicken in equal sizes to ensure even baking. If your pieces are different sizes, they’ll cook unevenly, giving you a mix of over- and under-cooked kabobs. If some portions of your chicken are thinner than others, feel free to fold them during the threading process to make them match the size of their fellow pieces.
  • Check for doneness: I recommend using a meat thermometer (affiliate link) to ensure that they are fully cooked. Poultry should reach 165 degrees F. before it’s safe to eat.
  • Do not skip the resting time: The key to juicy chicken kabobs is to let the skewers rest after removing them from the oven. Cover the baked chicken kabobs with foil for 5-10 minutes so that the meat can reabsorb its juices and ensure maximum flavor.

FAQs

Can you cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

Yes! Oven-roasting chicken skewers is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. Not only is this process much easier than grilling, but it also gives your chicken a juicy, tender texture and an irresistibly delectable taste.

How to cut chicken breast for kabobs?

Cut your boneless chicken breast into one-inch chunks before threading them through the skewers. Uniform pieces will ensure that your skewers bake evenly.

How long to cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

I recommend baking your chicken shish kabob for 15-16 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping it halfway through the cooking process. Then, broil your kabobs for one minute on each side to give them a crisp, golden-brown exterior.

What are the ideal temperature and bake time for cooking chicken kabobs in the oven?

The ideal temperature and time is 450 degrees F. for 15 minutes. However, with a two-minute broil, you can cook your skewers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 35-40 minutes. Or, roast your chicken kabobs at 375 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes and finish with a two-minute broil.

How long to broil chicken skewers?

You should broil chicken kabobs for one minute on each side to ensure optimal browning. However, keep an eye on your chicken during this process to keep them from burning under the broiler’s heat.

How to make chicken kabobs without skewers?

If you don’t have any skewers on hand, you can easily prepare deconstructed chicken kabobs in the oven. First, line a sheet pan with parchment paper, add your marinaded chicken cubes and vegetables, and roast the sheet pan chicken kabobs, flipping the meat and veggies once during baking.

Other Baked Chicken Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Baked Chicken Kabobs recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Oven baked chicken kabobs on a sheet pan from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kabobs in Oven Recipe

No grill? No problem! Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. With this easy recipe, you can enjoy juicy and flavorful chicken skewers all year long.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 4 hours 40 minutes
Servings 8 skewers
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil or avocado oil
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Kabobs

  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breast or boneless skinless chicken thighs cut into 1-inch chunks
  • 1 red onion quartered and sliced into 1-inch thick then separated into single layers
  • 2 green bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 yellow bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces

Instructions

  • Make the marinade: Whisk together olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (one that is large enough to accommodate all the chicken.)
  • Place the cubed chicken into the bowl. Toss to make sure all of the chicken is evenly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, pressing down to remove any air, and seal tightly. Place it in the fridge for at least an hour but up to 12 hours.
  • If you use wooden or bamboo skewers, soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before cooking kabobs in the oven.
  • When ready to assemble, start by preheating the oven to 450 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Loosely thread the chicken chunks on the skewer tapping off any excess marinade, and alternate with the onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. If your chicken is thin, you can fold it when threading on the skewer so all pieces cook evenly.
  • Place the kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. If desired, sprinkle them with ½ teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper.
  • Bake for 16 minutes, rotating once during baking. When rotating the skewers, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to flip the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones.
  • At the end of 15 minutes, switch the oven to broil and broil* the chicken kabobs for 1 minute on each side (no more than 2 minutes total.) This step helps brown the chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer into one of the cubes. It should be done when it reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Remove kebabs from the oven, cover loosely with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The approximate nutritional values listed below are per skewer.
  • Broiling: * Broiling chicken kabobs at the last minute help mimic the flavors of grilled chicken kabobs. However, if you prefer not to broil them, I recommend extending the cooking time in the oven to 20 minutes or until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Make ahead: To transform this baked chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, marinate the chicken up to two days in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge and thread your skewers when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. Alternatively, you can warm them up in a grill pan until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 519mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 104IU | Vitamin C: 62mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Chicken Kabobs in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/feed/ 4
Mediterranean Lemon Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/#comments Tue, 09 May 2023 17:05:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14063 Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and a little under an hour. Get ready for a delicious Mediterranean-inspired feast that is also gluten-free and low-carb diet friendly. And if you are looking for more Mediterranean-inspired chicken recipes, you might like Chicken with Bulgur, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Chicken Pita Wraps. Ingredients Mediterranean baked chicken wouldn’t be complete...

The post Mediterranean Lemon Chicken appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and a little under an hour. Get ready for a delicious Mediterranean-inspired feast that is also gluten-free and low-carb diet friendly.

And if you are looking for more Mediterranean-inspired chicken recipes, you might like Chicken with Bulgur, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Chicken Pita Wraps.

Baked Mediterranean chicken with lemon is in a skillet from the top view.

Ingredients

Mediterranean baked chicken wouldn’t be complete without a simple list of ingredients. All we need is a handful of ingredients, including:

Ingredients for this recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Chicken: Any chicken would work here, including bone-in chicken thighs, bone-in chicken breasts, skinless chicken thighs, boneless skinless chicken breasts, or a mix and match of any of those listed.
  • Olive oil
  • Potatoes: Yukon gold potatoes are my favorite, but any waxy yellow or red potato would also work.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves are the best and add tons of savory flavor.
  • Chicken broth: Either pick up a box of your favorite low-sodium chicken stock from the store or use your own Homemade Chicken Broth.
  • Olives: I used Castelvatrano green olives for their buttery richness, but any green olive, Kalamata olives, or black olives would all work. Omit the olives completely if you are not a fan, or swap them out for artichoke hearts instead.
  • Lemon: Use fresh lemon juice for the best flavor, and add some fresh lemon slices during cooking so that the flavor of the lemon rind infuses into the chicken. If you really want to amp up the lemon flavor, have a few extra lemon wedges on the side for serving.
  • Thyme: Fresh thyme is best for its special citrus-piney aroma, but dried thyme can also be used.  Fresh oregano is another popular herb to serve in this lemon chicken with olives recipe. However, keep in mind that the flavor is very strong when compared to dried oregano. Use 2-3 sprigs of fresh oregano or 1 tablespoon dried oregano.
  • Seasonings: We are using basic kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper for this recipe. However, if you have some on hand, you can sprinkle the chicken with our Mediterranean Chicken Seasoning.

How to Make Mediterranean Lemon Chicken?

This easy chicken with lemon and olives recipe comes together in one skillet, making this a healthy chicken dinner you can make any night of the week. Simply:

Person showing how to season chicken thighs in a collage of photos.
  1. Season chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs (or chicken breasts)  with a sheet of paper towel. Season all over with salt and pepper.
A collage of images showing how to make this healthy lemon chicken recipe.
  1. Brown chicken: Set an oven-proof skillet over medium heat and add the olive oil. Place chicken, skin-side down, and sear until golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue cooking the chicken on the other side for another 3-4 minutes.
  2. Add vegetables and broth: Scatter the potatoes and garlic evenly over the chicken and pour in the chicken broth. Turn it up to medium-high heat and bring to a boil.
  3. Add olives, lemon and herbs: Once the chicken broth has come to a boil, add the olives, lemon slices and thyme.
  4. Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through. 
  5. Serve: Serve the pieces of chicken, scooping some of the sauce and lemon slices directly on top for a delicious meal.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

This Mediterranean Chicken Bake can be stored in the fridge and reheated to enjoy throughout the week. Here’s how to do it:

  • Storage: Bring your lemon chicken to room temperature. Transfer into an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.

What to Serve It With?

This Lemon olive chicken recipe is a full meal by itself when served with a glass of white wine. However, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with one of the dishes below:

Mediterranean chicken bake served in plates garnished with lemon slices.

Expert Tips

With one bite of this Mediterranean lemon chicken, you will understand why we believe that this recipe will become a staple in your weekly menu. Below are a few helpful tips to ensure that your chicken is cooked to perfection and bursting with flavor:

  • Use an ovenproof skillet: I used my Le Creuset Braiser (affiliate link), which I use for just about all of my one-pot meals. It goes from stovetop to oven in a flash. However, if you do not own an ovenproof skillet, first brown the chicken in a cast-iron skillet (or large nonstick skillet), then transfer to a small baking dish (or baking sheet) to finish cooking in the oven. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Make it your own: Play around with the combination of olives and/or herbs to give it your personal touch. Fresh parsley, fresh dill, fresh basil, or a combination of all three would make an excellent addition.
  • Check for doneness. The cooking time will vary based on the thickness of the chicken. Your chicken is fully cooked when the internal temperature registers 165 degrees F on an instant-read thermometer when inserted at the thickest part of the meat without touching the bone.
  • Serving Suggestion: Be sure to scoop some of the juices in the pan directly over the chicken when serving. I also garnish it with bruised olives and a few caramelized lemon slices for a visually stunning meal.

Other Weeknight Chicken Dinners You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Lemon Chicken recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean lemon chicken bake in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Lemon Chicken Recipe

This Mediterranean Lemon Chicken is the dictionary definition of a wholesome and visually appealing dinner made in one-pot. Ready in less than an hour, it is the perfect weeknight dinner or weekend feast.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 583kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1/4 pounds bone-in skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2/3 pound Yukon gold potatoes washed and halved (or quartered, depending on the size)
  • 6 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup chicken broth
  • ½ cup large pitted green olives such as Castelvatrano
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 6-7 sprigs of fresh thyme

Instructions

  • Prep chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels. Season well with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Brown chicken: Heat olive oil in an oven-proof skillet set over medium heat. Sear the chicken, skin-side down, until browned, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and cook the other side for another 3-4 minutes. Do your best not to move them so much. Chicken should release once it is properly seared.
  • Add vegetables and broth: Add in the potatoes and garlic and spread them around the chicken. Pour in the chicken broth. Bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rest: Add in the olives. Distribute the slices of lemon and thyme evenly over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven. Bake until chicken is fully cooked and tender, 20-25 minutes.
  • Serve: Serve immediately alongside your favorite rice, bulgur, quinoa, or salad.

Video

Notes

  • Yield: Depending on the size of your chicken thighs, this recipe yields 5-6 thighs with plenty of potatoes to serve with on the side. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Plating: When plating, be sure to drizzle the juices over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature before storing them. Once cooled, transfer them into an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Braised Chicken with Potatoes, Olives and Lemon recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 583kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 212mg | Sodium: 969mg | Potassium: 874mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 240IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Mediterranean Lemon Chicken appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/feed/ 34
Eggplant Beef Stew https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/#comments Mon, 03 Apr 2023 23:15:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1169 Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level. Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes. Ingredients Many of the ingredients...

The post Eggplant Beef Stew appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level.

Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes.

Beef and eggplant stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Many of the ingredients for this beef stew with eggplant are pantry staples, along with a few that are easy to grab on a quick trip to the grocery store. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.
  • Stew meat: You can use Sirloin steak tips, or a whole boneless beef chuck roast cut into 1 – 1 ½ inch cubes.
  • Aromatics: Onions and garlic give it a deep, savory flavor.
  • Olive oil
  • Spices and seasonings: These include ground cumin, paprika, bay leaf, salt, and black pepper.
  • Peppers: I like jalapenos for a kick of spice or red bell peppers for mild.
  • Tomatoes: We are using tomato paste and canned tomatoes (diced or crushed).
  • Eggplant: Globe eggplant is the easiest to find in grocery stores and commercial varieties mean you no longer have to deal with Sweating Eggplant. But feel free to use any Type of Eggplant you love.
  • Chicken stock: Homemade Chicken Stock will provide the best flavor, but a store-bought chicken broth would also work.
  • Green peas: Blanched Frozen Peas or store-bought frozen peas will both work.
  • Herbs: Fresh parsley or fresh oregano leaves would also work.

How to Make Eggplant Beef Stew?

This beef with aubergine recipe takes some time and patience, but your efforts will be worth it in the end. Here’s how I like to make it:

Person drying the meat and meat is in the dutch oven.
  1. Dry meat: Dry the stew meat with a paper towel on all sides.
  2. Prep meat: Set the Dutch oven over low heat and add the meat and quartered onion. Cover with the lid and let it cook for 1 hour (no peeking).
  3. Keep it low and slow: At the end of 1 hour, open the lid and give the meat and onions a stir. Cover again and continue to cook for another 2 hours. After 2 hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat – the beauty of this recipe is to cook it low and slow.
A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Finish beef: Continue cooking the meat for another 2 hours, stirring at the end of each hour. The meat should now be super soft. There may be some liquid in the pot, depending on the stew meat, which is totally fine. Give it a taste and make sure that it is soft and not too chewy. If it is, then continue cooking for another 30 minutes to an hour.
  2. Remove meat: Remove the meat, onion, and all the juices from the Dutch oven into a bowl. Cover with foil to keep warm. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  3. Saute aromatics and spices: In the same Dutch oven, heat olive oil over medium heat and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 1 minute, or until fragrant.
  4. Add veggies & let it simmer: Add the prepared eggplant, tomatoes, chicken stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper. Place the beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a stir and cover it with the lid. Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer for 15-20 minutes. 
  5. Add peas: After the 15-minute mark, add the frozen peas. Bring it to a final boil and let it simmer until ready to serve.
  6. Serve: When ready to serve, remove the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.
Turkish Style eggplant beef stew after it is cooked in a big pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, Reheat and Freeze?

Beef stew and eggplant can be made ahead of time and stored in the fridge or freezer for longer storage. Here’s how to do it:

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew any night of the week.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

What to Serve It With?

Any of my side dish recipes would pair wonderfully with this recipe. But if you are looking for some inspiration, some of my favorites include:

Beef eggplant stew in a plate with bread on the side.

Expert Tips

  • So delicious, you don’t even need salt. Don’t fret about not salting the meat in the beginning. The low and slow cooking method creates meat so delicious you’ll find you will not need salt until braising.
  • Keep it low and slow. Trust the process, and the meat will cook through until melt-in-your-mouth tender. Patience is a virtue with this one.
  • A quick tip for preparing eggplant for cooking: As I cut eggplant, I place it in a large bowl of water with some Kosher salt to prevent the eggplant from oxidizing and turning brown.
  • Use one kind of stew meat to ensure the best flavor and even cooking. As I learned from The Kitchn’s article, Best Choice of Meat for Stew, using one type of meat cut in equal sizes will ensure that you will end up with an eggplant beef stew that is evenly cooked.
  • Incorporate other vegetables. Mushrooms, green beans, or potatoes can be used instead of (or in addition to) eggplant. Keep in mind, potatoes or other root vegetables might take longer to cook.
  • Keep it on the smallest heat source. Use the smallest burner on the stovetop over the lowest heat setting when first cooking the meat and onions.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe in the slow cooker?

I would not recommend making this in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot) as the slow cooker is too hot, even on the low setting. The magic of this recipe is to keep it on the smallest and lowest heat source on the stove.

Can you put eggplant in beef stew?

Yes, it is one that I use in many of my stew recipes. It cooks very fast and absorbs the many delicious flavors of beef and vegetables.

How long does eggplant need to be cooked in stew?

Eggplant only takes about 15-20 minutes to cook through in stew.

Do you need to peel eggplant for stew?

No, this is a personal choice. The skin is edible, so unpeeled eggplant is just fine.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Eggplant and beef stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Eggplant Beef Stew Recipe

Eggplant Beef Stew served with bulgur pilaf makes a satisfying dish with tender pull-apart meat. Cooked low and slow, this Turkish style beef stew is a must try!
Course Beef
Cuisine American, Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 295kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs stew meat Sirloin steak tips or boneless beef chuck roast, cut into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 1 large yellow onions peeled and cut into quarters
  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil olive oil or avocado oil
  • 3 jalapeno peppers seeded and chopped – or bell pepper would also work
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 eggplant cut into cubes ~ 1 lb.
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 14.5 oz.
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 cup frozen peas no need to thaw
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley freshly chopped
  • Pinch red pepper flakes or Aleppo pepper if you can get your hands on it

Instructions

  • Dry meat: Using paper towels, pat-dry the stew meat as much as you can.
  • Cook meat: Place meat in a Dutch oven with the quartered onion over low heat. Put the lid on and let it cook for an hour without opening it. I recommend using the smallest burner on your stovetop.
  • Keep it low and slow: At the end of an hour, give it a stir, put the lid back on and let it continue to cook for another two hours. At the end of two hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat or move to a larger burner; the beauty of this recipe is to cook low and slow.
  • Finish beef: Continue to cook for another 2 hours, giving it a stir at the end of each hour mark. In the end, the meat should be super soft. Depending on the stew meat you are using, there may be some liquid in the pot, which is okay.
  • Remove meat: Remove the meat and onion (and all the juices) from the pot into a bowl, cover with foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the dutch oven.
  • Saute aromatics and spices: In the same dutch oven over medium heat, heat olive oil and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for a minute.
  • Add veggies: Add the cubed eggplant, tomatoes, stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper.
  • Simmer: Put the now-cooked beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a quick stir, cover it with the lid, bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes. Add the frozen peas and let them come to one last boil.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, make sure to take out the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew on a weeknight.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

Nutrition

Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 563mg | Potassium: 1025mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 601IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Eggplant Beef Stew appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/feed/ 17
Chicken with Bulgur https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/#comments Thu, 05 Jan 2023 21:23:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2845 If you’re not accustomed to cooking with bulgur wheat (also known as burghul), this dish is a great place to start! Bulgur, a whole grain, is often used in Mediterranean cooking to add a nutty flavor and chewy texture to a variety of meals. To learn more about this yummy grain, look no further than my comprehensive guide, What is Bulgur Wheat?  Ingredients We’re using Mediterranean-inspired spices, such as cumin...

The post Chicken with Bulgur appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you’re not accustomed to cooking with bulgur wheat (also known as burghul), this dish is a great place to start! Bulgur, a whole grain, is often used in Mediterranean cooking to add a nutty flavor and chewy texture to a variety of meals. To learn more about this yummy grain, look no further than my comprehensive guide, What is Bulgur Wheat? 

A roasted chicken thigh with bulgur wheat on a plate with a fork from the top view.

Ingredients

We’re using Mediterranean-inspired spices, such as cumin and paprika, to season the juicy, tender chicken thighs. The rest of the dish is packed with bulgur wheat to add substance and a satisfying, chewy texture. Here’s a breakdown of what you’ll need:

Ingredients for a dish with chicken thighs and bulgur from the top view.
  • For the bulgur wheat, you can choose from various types of bulgur. I like to use medium coarse bulgur (affiliate link) but you can also use Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur (affiliate link).
  • To make the chicken bulgur recipe, you’ll need skinless, bone-in chicken thighs, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, black pepper, an onion, a bell pepper, garlic, sun-dried tomatoes, bulgur wheat, chicken stock (my favorite recipe is Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock), chopped fresh parsley, and feta cheese (optional). 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you don’t have one or more of the above ingredients and you’re in a pinch, feel free to make some swaps and substitutions to accommodate what you have on hand. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Bulgur: While I love to use bulgur for the heartiness, flavor, and texture it provides, I know that it can sometimes be tricky to find at the grocery store. If your local store is out of stock and there’s no time to buy online, you can rest assured that recipes with bulgur wheat and chicken taste great with other grain substitutes. Among all the bulgur substitutes, we recommend using quinoa for this recipe, as it provides a similar texture and flavor. If you’re unfamiliar with quinoa, we have an easy guide to help you cook quinoa with confidence.
  • Seasonings: I chose to keep things simple by seasoning the meat with cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper. If these seasonings don’t appeal to your taste buds, try substituting them with Mediterranean Spice Blend, Italian seasoning, dried oregano, or dried thyme to add a pleasant, mild flavor to the dish. 
  • Sun-dried tomatoes: For this one pot bulgur dish, I recommend purchasing a jar of sun-dried tomatoes in olive oil (8 ounces), as they tend to have the best flavor. You can also purchase packaged and dehydrated sun-dried tomatoes, although I recommend soaking them in a bowl of water for 5 minutes before adding them in. Regular canned tomatoes would also work in a pinch, but be sure only to use a cup of stock if you’re adding in the canned tomatoes with their juices. 

How to Make Chicken with Bulgur

While this Mediterranean bulgur with chicken looks (and tastes) like a restaurant-worthy dish, it requires minimal effort and only one skillet! Once you sear the meat and saute the rest of the ingredients in the pan, all you have to do is pop it in the oven, sprinkle it with a little parsley, and set it on the table to enjoy. Here’s how to make it:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to oil and season chicken thighs from the top view.
  1. Prep the meat: Use paper towels to thoroughly dry each chicken thigh. Drizzle them with olive oil. 
  2. Mix the seasoning: Add the cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and mix until combined. 
  3. Season the meat: Rub each thigh with the spice mixture. 
  4. Heat the skillet: Add the olive oil to an oven-safe skillet (affiliate link) and heat over medium-high heat until the oil shimmers. 
A person searing chicken and cooking veggies from the top view.
  1. Sear: Place the thighs in the hot pan and sear for 4-5 minutes per side until lightly golden brown. There’s no need to fully cook the chicken, as you’re aiming just to give it some color. Transfer to a plate and set aside. 
  2. Saute the onion: Add the onion and pepper to the same skillet and saute for 7-8 minutes or until the onion is translucent. 
  3. Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes: Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes and cook for an additional minute. 
A person adding bulgur wheat and chicken stock to a pot.
  1. Add the bulgur: Add the bulgur and constantly stir for 2-3 minutes as it cooks. 
  2. Add the stock: Pour in the stock and place the seared thighs back in the skillet. Let the bulgur mixture come to a boil. 
  3. Bake: Carefully place the skillet in the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes or until the internal temperature of one of the thighs registers 165 degrees F. 
  4. Garnish and serve: Remove the skillet from the oven and top with feta cheese (if using) and chopped fresh parsley. Serve. 

How to Serve

If you’re in need of a quick weeknight dinner, you can skip the sides and serve this burghul chicken as a complete meal. The meat adds lots of protein, and the bulgur makes it ultra hearty and filling! If you have the time, I recommend whipping up my Creamy Yoghurt Dill Sauce to drizzle right on top. 

You can also pair this dish with a side salad to add a boost of nutrients. Continue with the Turkish theme by pairing it with a Turkish Bean Salad, or keep things simple and make my Spring Salad Recipe

How to Store, Freeze, Reheat, and Thaw

Once you’ve enjoyed this bulgur chicken recipe for dinner, you can store your leftovers in the fridge for an easy next-day lunch or dinner option. This dish also freezes well, so feel free to make extra to store away for busy weeks ahead. Here are a few tips:

  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container with a lid. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the bulgur chicken dish to room temperature and place it in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Freeze for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in the skillet on the stove. You may need to add a little water or stock to keep it from drying out. Or, reheat it in the microwave for about a minute or two, stirring every 30 seconds or so to ensure that it is heating evenly.
  • Thaw: Thaw the leftover bulgur wheat with chicken (from frozen) overnight in the fridge. 
A chicken and grain dish topped with feta cheese from the top view.

Expert Tips

While this recipe is fairly simple and straightforward, having some helpful tips and tricks in your toolkit can help you achieve restaurant-quality results on your first try. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Saute the bulgur before adding the stock: It might be tempting to add the bulgur and chicken broth at the same time, but it’s actually important to first saute the burger before adding your liquid. Taking the time to saute the bulgur with the rest of the ingredients ensures that the grain soaks up all those yummy flavors. I also follow this method for my Turkish Bulgur Pilaf, which resembles a bulgur risotto. 
  • Sear until just browned: We’re lightly searing the thighs before allowing them to cook fully in the oven. Most bulgur recipes with chicken recommend this method as well, as it locks in moisture and flavor. Don’t skip this step, as it only takes a few minutes and will definitely pay off in terms of texture and taste.

FAQs

Do I need to pre soak bulgur?

There is no need to pre-soak your bulgur. Bulgur is a fairly thin grain that cooks quickly, so you’ll be able to achieve a fluffy, tender texture without soaking it first.

Do I need to rinse bulgur before cooking?

Rinsing bulgur before cooking isn’t necessary, but it all comes down to personal preference. If you prefer to rinse your bulgur, you can place it in a colander and rinse it with cold water.

Other One-Pot Chicken Recipes You Might Like

One-pot meals are truly life-saving when you’re in need of a yummy, no-fuss dinner that requires minimal cleanup. If you like chicken and bulgur wheat recipes like this one, you’ll also love these other single-skillet meals: 

If you try this One Pot Chicken and Bulgur recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean Bulgur with Chicken in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Chicken with Bulgur Recipe

Chicken with Bulgur is a Mediterranean-inspired dish that features juicy chicken thighs and fluffy, tender bulgur wheat. This one-pot recipe comes together in under an hour for a quick weeknight dinner or an easy, impressive dinner party entree.
Course Main
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 560kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 chicken thighs skinless bone in
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 medium-size onion chopped (~1 cup)1 bell pepper, chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 jar sun-dried tomatoes 8oz. drained and roughly chopped
  • 1 ½ cups bulgur wheat
  • 1 ¾ cups chicken stock
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (optional)
  • ½ cup chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 F˚.
  • Pat dry chicken thighs on all sides with paper towels. Drizzle them with olive oil.
  • Mix together cumin, paprika, salt and pepper in a small bowl until fully mixed.
  • Sprinkle chicken on all sides using the spice mixture.
  • Heat a large oven-proof skillet over medium heat until it is shimmering hot.
  • Add the now-seasoned thighs and sear for about 4 minutes on each side until they are nicely browned. We are not cooking the meat fully here, but rather just browning it. Transfer onto a plate and set aside.
  • Add the onion and pepper to the now-empty skillet and cook, scraping the chicken bits at the bottom using a wooden spoon for about 7-8 minutes or until the onion is translucent.
  • Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes and cook for one minute.
  • Add in the bulgur wheat and cook, constantly stirring, for 2-3 minutes.
  • Pour in the stock and transfer the seared chicken back into the skillet. Bring it to a boil.
  • Transfer the skillet to the preheated oven and roast for 15 minutes or until a digital thermometer inserted in one of the thighs registers 165 F˚.
  • Carefully remove from the oven and sprinkle with feta cheese (if using) and chopped parsley. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the dish to room temperature and place it in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Freeze for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in the skillet on the stove. You may need to add a little water or stock to keep it from drying out. Or, reheat it in the microwave for about a minute or two, stirring every 30 seconds or so to ensure that it is heating evenly.
  • Thaw: Thaw the leftovers (from frozen) overnight in the fridge. 
  • It is optional, but you can add a fresh squeeze of lemon juice at the end for a great way to brighten the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 560kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 216mg | Sodium: 610mg | Potassium: 623mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 426IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Chicken with Bulgur appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/feed/ 14
Spinach and Feta Cheese Bรถrek https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 22:52:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1824 What is Borek? Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made by layering ultra-thin dough, an egg mixture, and various fillings. Borek also comes in many shapes and sizes, ranging from cigarette-shaped rolls to large trays.  Traditionally, chefs prepare borek with Turkish yufka dough, an ultra-thin, unleavened dough made from flour, water, and salt. Yufka pastry leaves recipes—like borek—often use layers...

The post Spinach and Feta Cheese Bรถrek appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Borek?

Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made by layering ultra-thin dough, an egg mixture, and various fillings. Borek also comes in many shapes and sizes, ranging from cigarette-shaped rolls to large trays. 

Traditionally, chefs prepare borek with Turkish yufka dough, an ultra-thin, unleavened dough made from flour, water, and salt. Yufka pastry leaves recipes—like borek—often use layers of a yogurt or milk mixture to keep the dough equally moist and flakey. 

Turkish borek sliced and placed on an oval plate

Although feta and spinach borek is a quintessential Turkish dish, you can find Turkish borek recipes across the former Ottoman Empire. The Balkans, Eastern Europe, and even Northern Africa are just a few places. Perhaps because of the pastry’s geographic range, its name has many alternate spellings. “Bourek,” “burek,” “börek,” and even “bòrek” are all popular variations.

Recipe Ingredients

Who knew authentic Turkish cuisine could be so easy to make? This spinach borek recipe only uses simple ingredients that you can find at your local grocery store.

yogurt wash and phyllo dough - ingredients for borek recipe on a marble backdrop
  • Phyllo Dough: You’ll need one package of phyllo dough to make this recipe, which you can find in the grocery store’s frozen section. Though chefs traditionally make Turkish borek dough from layers of yufka, phyllo dough (this is the brand I used) is easier to find here in the U.S. so that’s what I am using. Be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Yogurt Wash to Keep Layers Moist: For the yogurt wash, gather olive oil, whole milk, egg, plain unsweetened yogurt, salt, and black pepper.
spinach and feta filling ingredients from the top view
  • Borek Filling: In this spinach burek recipe, your filling will consist of olive oil, chopped onion, baby spinach, kosher salt, black pepper, crumbled feta cheese, sesame seeds, and egg yolks. You may also add poppy seeds or Nigella seeds if desired.

Substitutions

  • Cheese: Turkish feta cheese is a classic in this traditional börek recipe, but shredded mozzarella, cheddar cheese, and Monterey jack would also work.
  • Oil: If you’d rather not use olive oil, you can make this bourek recipe extra rich by using melted butter instead. Just make sure the butter is cool before using it.
  • Baby spinach: Swiss chard makes an excellent substitution for fresh spinach in this Turkish cheese pastry, as long as you sauté it first. You could also replace the baby spinach with potatoes for a heartier filling.

How to Make Borek with Spinach

Sheet pan borek is one of my recipe book’s tastiest and most effortless Turkish side dishes. You can learn how to make borek like an expert in just a few simple steps.

Cook the Vegetables & Make the Filling

person sauteeing veggies and making the yogurt milk mixture
  1. Sauté the veggies: Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion to the pan and cook, frequently stirring, until translucent (4-5 minutes). Then, add the baby spinach, salt, and pepper to the pan. Toss the mixture every few minutes using kitchen tongs. Let it cook until the spinach loses most of its volume (approx. 5 minutes). Turn off the heat and let the veggies cool for 15-20 minutes.
    PRO TIP: If your veggie filling has too much liquid, I recommend straining the juices using a colander. Straining will keep your borek from turning soggy when fully assembled.
  2. Prepare the yogurt milk mixture: While your vegetables cool, whisk your olive oil, milk, egg, whole-milk yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a measuring cup.
  3. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. 

Layer the Phyllo Dough

a collage of photos showing how to assemble borek from the start
  1. Layer the bottom borek sheets: Line your sheet pan with parchment paper. Then, layer sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper until the whole pan is covered, using as many sheets as necessary. Let any excess dough hang over the sides. 
  2. Brush the phyllo: Lay a second layer of phyllo on top of the first, covering every part of the sheet pan. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture over the sheets, and use a pastry brush to spread it evenly over the dough.
  3. Add layers: Add another two layers of phyllo sheets on top of the first. Brush the top layer again with yogurt wash. Then, place one more layer of phyllo dough on the washed layer. Don’t brush this top layer with the milk mixture.
  4. Layer the filling: Distribute your cooled sautéed veggies over the top sheet of phyllo in one even layer. Then, sprinkle the crumbled feta cheese evenly over the spinach. 
a collage of images showing how to assemble cheese borak food
  1. Layer the top borek sheets: Place another two layers of phyllo dough over the spinach filling, covering it completely. Brush the top layer with the milk and yogurt wash. Then, place two more layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer. Brush the top of the assembled pastry with an even layer of the yogurt mixture.
  2. Fold excess dough: If any sheets are hanging over the side of the pan, fold them in toward the pastry’s center. Be sure to brush this extra dough with the milk mixture. At this point, your borek should look moist and tightly packed.
collage of photos showing before and after bourek recipe is baked.
  1. Cut the pastry: Cut your borek into 12 equal pieces using a knife. 
  2. Add toppings: Mix the egg yolks in a bowl. Brush the top layer of the borek with a generous layer of egg wash. If desired, sprinkle the top with sesame seeds and nigella seeds.
  3. Bake: Bake the borek in the preheated oven for 30-35 minutes or until the top is golden brown. 
  4. Serve: Remove the pastry from the oven and let it cool for 15-20 minutes on a wire rack. Then, slice it along the pre-cut lines, and serve while still warm.

What to Serve with Borek

There’s a reason why so many people call it “borek bread.” This flaky and flavorful Turkish side makes a perfect pair with any dish you’d eat with bread, from light salads to meaty mains.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

Make meal prep stress a thing of the past with this Turkish cheese borek recipe. Whether you make this dish a day or an entire month in advance, these storage tips have you covered.

  • Make ahead: To make your pastry ahead of time, cook the burek spinach and onions one day in advance. Store the veggies in an airtight container in the fridge, removing it when you’re ready to assemble your borek. Another option is to assemble the entire pastry, cover it with plastic wrap, and store it in the fridge overnight. Then, cook your burek as usual when ready to eat.
  • Store: Leftover borek will stay fresh for up to 3 days when stored in an airtight container. Just be sure to let it reach room temperature before storing.
  • Freeze: You can freeze your spinach burek recipe for up to one month before baking it. Just be sure to cover the pastry tightly with plastic wrap and cover it with aluminum foil to prevent freezer burn.
  • Thaw: Transfer your burek from the freezer to the fridge one full day before you plan to bake it. Then, bake the pastry according to the standard cooking directions (350 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes).

Filling Variations

The sky’s the limit when it comes to filling this Turkish cheese pastry. Whether you want a borek recipe with meat or a cheese burek for feta fans, these popular fillings are just what you need.

  • Meat borek: Make your pastry extra satisfying by adding a savory protein. Any meat will work, but ground beef borek, borek with minced meat, and ground lamb borek are some of my favorite savory fillings.
  • Cheese & herbs: Don’t want to add veggies? No problem! Borek with cheese and fresh herbs is a common filling you’ll adore. Simply fill your Turkish filo pastry with feta cheese and fresh parsley.
  • Try it with different vegetables: When you make burek, spinach is only one of the countless delicious veggies you can use. Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms and Baked Portobello Mushrooms are two of my favorite alternatives.
turkish cheese borek right after it comes out of the oven

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make international eats. With these foolproof tips, your cheese and spinach borek will come out flaky, gooey, and decadent every time.

  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.
  • It’s OK if you miss a layer: Don’t stress if you miss a layer when assembling your borek. This dish is highly forgiving, and it’s always better to have too few layers than too many.
  • Cover the filo sheets with a damp towel: As you are making this Turkish spinach borek recipe, be sure to cover the filo dough sheets with a damp towel to prevent them from drying. 
  • Don’t skimp on the yogurt wash: Be sure to spread the yogurt wash evenly over your Turkish pastry. Every layer should be adequately moist after brushing. 
  • Slice before baking: Slicing the borek pastry before it goes into the oven will make cutting and serving much easier. Simply slice the dough into your ideal portion sizes when you finish layering your borek.
  • Let the borek sit overnight: Though this step is optional, I highly recommend letting your borek recipe sit in the fridge overnight. Allowing your borek to rest will give your phyllo dough time to absorb the flavorful liquid, giving your pastry extra moisture and savoriness.
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sautéed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before adding it to your borek. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Prewashed baby spinach: If you have a busy schedule or simply don’t want to spend hours in the kitchen, prewashed baby spinach will save you oodles of time.
  • Phyllo dough vs. puff pastry: Though phyllo dough and puff pastry can be found in the same section of the grocery store, they are not interchangeable. French puff pastry contains many layers of dough and butter, which rise and become airy in the oven. By contrast, phyllo pastry is paper-thin and bakes to a super fine, flaky texture.
Learn how to make Turkish Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek recipe - Borek served with Turkish Tea.

FAQs

You don’t have to be Turkish to be a borek buff. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions about my recipe for Turkish borek, from the dish’s national origins to its nutritional content.

Is borek the same as spanakopita?

Turkish borek and Greek spanakopita come from the same family of pastry. However, the two often differ in preparation and texture, with Greek spanakopita often having a flakier, puffier crust. 

Is it burek or borek?

Both spellings of this pastry are technically correct, depending on the country. Turkish people tend to spell the name as “borek,” while “burek” is more common in the Balkans.

What countries have burek?

Many may think of borek as Turkish food. However, you can find this iconic dish in numerous countries across the former Ottoman Empire. This area includes countries in the Balkans, Middle East, and Northern Africa.

Is spinach borek healthy?

This recipe for burek with cheese isn’t the healthiest, with many calories coming from fats and carbs. However, borek can provide essential nutrients from its vitamin-rich spinach and calcium-rich feta when enjoyed in moderation.

How do you eat borek?

 Traditionally, people have Turkish cheese borek for breakfast or brunch during family gatherings. However, you can eat borek alongside any meal in place of bread.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Turkish Borek recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person serving spinach and feta cheese borek
Print

Spinach and Feta Cheese Börek – Turkish Borek Recipe

Learn how to make Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek – A classic Turkish Borek recipe made with stuffing phyllo sheets with spinach and feta. This authentic and simple recipe can be made ahead and baked right before serving for a warm and delicious breakfast or brunch recipe.
Course Appetizer, Breakfast
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 174kcal

Ingredients

For the Spinach and Feta filling:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • 1 medium-size onion peeled and chopped
  • 16 oz. baby spinach leaves washed and dried
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 oz. crumbled feta cheese

For The Milk Yogurt Mixture:

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 tablespoons plain whole-milk yogurt
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

For The Layers:

  • 1 package of Phyllo Dough* thawed overnight in the fridge
  • 2 egg yolks
  • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds
  • ½ teaspoon Nigella seeds optional

Instructions

  • Cook the filling: Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large pan at medium heat. Add the chopped onion and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add the spinach, salt, and pepper. Cook it, tossing it every few minutes using kitchen tongs, until the spinach loses most of its volume, around 5 minutes. Give it a stir and turn the heat off. Let it cool for 15 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Make the yogurt milk mixture: Whisk olive oil, milk, egg, yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a bowl until combined.
  • To assemble: Line a baking sheet (mine is 12X17) with parchment paper. In a single layer, place sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper. Use as many sheets as you need to make sure that the pan’s whole surface is covered. It is okay if some filo is overhanging on the sides.
  • Place another layer of phyllo on top of the first, again making sure that the bottom of the pan is covered. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture on the top layer of dough and brush it over the filo sheets, making sure that it is evenly spread.
  • Stack another two layers of phyllo dough on top of the first two. Again, brush the milk mixture over the top phyllo sheet. Then, cover the top sheet with one more layer of phyllo dough—not two. Do not brush the top sheet with the milk mixture again.
  • Spread the now-cooled spinach and crumbled feta cheese evenly over the top layer of phyllo sheets.
  • Place another two layers of phyllo sheets over the filling, covering it completely. Brush another 3-4 teaspoons of the milk mixture over the topmost sheet. Then, place two final layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer, and brush the top with the milk mixture. You should have 9 layers of dough in total.
  • If there are sheets overhanging on the side, fold them in towards the pastry’s center and make sure that they are brushed with the milk mixture. At this point, the borek should look nicely moist and tightly packed.
  • Using a sharp knife, pre-slice borek into 12 equal pieces (please refer to the video for a visual).
  • Mix egg yolks in a bowl.
  • Brush each slice with egg yolk and sprinkle with sesame seeds and nigella seeds if using.
  • Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes or until it turns golden brown.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, slice, and serve while it is still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Prior to adding salt to the filling, it is good to taste your feta cheese and determine if you need more salt or not.
  • If you have time, I recommend letting your borek rest before baking it. Simply cover the baking sheet with plastic wrap and place it in the fridge. Let the pastry rest for a few hours or up to overnight. Then, bake as usual.
  • Depending on the size of the sheet pan you are using, you may not need to use the whole package of phyllo dough. 
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sauteed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before using it as a filling. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 6851IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 219mg | Iron: 3mg

This recipe was originally published in November 2013. It has been updated in June 2022 with new text, photos, and a how-to video with very minor edits (mostly for clarification) to the originally published recipe.

The post Spinach and Feta Cheese Bรถrek appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/feed/ 64
Cream of Zucchini Soup https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-soup/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 14:35:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1258 As zucchini season nears, you may start looking for an excellent zucchini soup recipe that you can serve warm or cold. This “Cream of Courgette Soup”, as she would call it, was passed down from my mother and has proven time and again to be the best zucchini soup recipe. If you’re not in the mood for soup but still want to use your fresh zucchini from your kitchen garden,...

The post Cream of Zucchini Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As zucchini season nears, you may start looking for an excellent zucchini soup recipe that you can serve warm or cold. This “Cream of Courgette Soup”, as she would call it, was passed down from my mother and has proven time and again to be the best zucchini soup recipe.

If you’re not in the mood for soup but still want to use your fresh zucchini from your kitchen garden, check out some of my other zucchini recipes, such as Zucchini Shrimp Scampi, Zucchini Noodles, Baked Zucchini Fritters, or Paleo Zucchini Bread with Almond Flour. During the summer months, when I have so much zucchini to use these are the recipes I make.

Person serving a bowl of cream of zucchini soup garnished with yogurt and dill.

Why I Love This Recipe:

The wonderful thing about this easy soup is that it is so versatile. Regardless of who you are or where you are, there is a way to make this soup into something you love.

  • Garden Fresh: This soup is excellent for using up all those fresh garden zucchini (aka courgette) that you have been growing all summer long.
  • 5 Ingredients, One Pot, and 30 minutes is all you need: This easy creamy zucchini soup recipe only requires 5 ingredients (plus salt and pepper) and is made in one pot.
  • Creamy without Heavy Cream: Thanks to the addition of one small potato, the soup is super creamy without a drop of heavy cream.
  • Diet-Friendly: Zucchini is a healthy source of vitamins and minerals. Without modifying the recipe, you have a gluten-free, low-carb, dairy-free, low calorie, and vegan-friendly soup. It can also be made keto-friendly with one minor adjustment.
  • Enjoy Year-Round: On a cold winter night, you can warm the soup up, providing warmth and comfort without being too heavy. Enjoy it cold in the summer and let the fresh zucchini cool you off after a day in the heat.

Ingredient Checklist:

As I mentioned before, you will only need 5 core ingredients (plus salt and pepper) for this comforting soup. Grab them at any local market or from your own garden!

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out

You will need 4 medium-sized zucchini (approximately 1 1/2 lbs), 1 small/ medium onion, 1 medium-sized Yukon Gold potato (5 oz.), 2 cloves of garlic, 4 cups of vegetable broth, 1 teaspoon of Kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper. 

Toppings and Substitutions:

  • Optional Toppings: While this creamy courgette soup is perfectly delicious by itself, I decided to top it off with a dollop of my Greek Yogurt Sauce (made with plain yogurt) and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice. I also sprinkled it with some chopped fresh dill but fresh parsley would also work. 
  • Vegetable Broth or Chicken Stock: I wanted my zucchini soup vegan so I used vegetable broth as the liquid in the recipe. However, if you are okay with it not being vegan/vegetarian, you can make your zucchini soup with chicken broth. If you decide to do so, simply replace the 4 cups of vegetable broth with 2 cups of chicken broth and 2 cups of water. Avoid using 4 cups of chicken broth, as the chicken taste will overpower the rest of the dish.
    With this being said, if you plan to serve this soup cold, it is highly recommended that you use vegetable stock. This will bring out the fresh flavors of the vegetables used.

How to Make Zucchini Soup Recipe:

  1. Prepare Ingredients: Prepare zucchini by cutting into 3-inch pieces (peeling is optional). Next, peel and cut the potato into chunks. Then, peel the onion and cut it in half (no need to chop). Lastly, peel the garlic cloves. 
person showing the step of making courgette soup in four step by step photos
  1. Combine Ingredients: Combine zucchini, onion, potato, garlic, vegetable broth, salt, and pepper and dump into a large pot, dutch oven, or 4-quart saucepan. Place the lid on top and place over medium-high heat.
  2. Boil and Simmer: Bring mixture to a boil and simmer for 20-25 minutes or until zucchini is tender. You can check doneness by inserting a knife through one of the zucchini or potato pieces. If it comes in and out easily, your zucchini potato soup is ready for blending. 
person showing the doneness of veggies and blending the soup in two how to photos.
  1. Blend: Remove from heat and blend mixture using an immersion blender. If you do not have an immersion blender, you can use a regular blender or a food processor. Simply puree until it is creamy with no chunks remaining. 
  2. Garnish: Add an optional garnish of yogurt sauce. You may substitute yogurt sauce with a dollop of sour cream, if you prefer. Add a squeeze of lemon or lime juice and top with fresh dill for a little extra flavor, taking this soup to the next level.

How to Serve:

When serving this delicious soup, use your creativity! There is an easy way to make this soup perfect for anyone. Below you will find my favorite ways to enjoy this delicious cream of zucchini soup.

  • Creamy Yogurt Topping: My favorite option for garnish is my quick and easy Greek Yogurt Sauce. This was a staple at home growing up in Turkey and it is how my mom served it. It makes a great addition to the soup and many of my other Turkish dishes
  • Sour Cream: Depending on what you have in your kitchen, you can easily top this Cream of Zucchini Soup with a dollop of sour cream instead of the yogurt sauce.
  • A drizzle of Extra Virgin Olive Oil: For a simple garnish, I usually drizzle it with a tablespoon of olive oil, a squeeze of lemon juice, and sprinkle it with a pinch of flaky sea salt and an optional red pepper flakes (for some heat) to finish.
  • Cheese: A sprinkling of feta or parmesan cheese is an excellent addition to this light soup. 
  • Fresh Dill (or parsley): You may even want to visit your garden for a fresh sprig of dill to top off this soup. Alternatively, you can also use fresh Italian parsley as garnish.
  • Crusty Bread: If you are looking for a heartier option, serve this soup with a crusty loaf of bread like my No-Knead Bread or Olive Bread. Both of these bread recipes pair well with many creamy soups, providing a great combination of flavors and textures. 
Person mixing soup with a ladle and a bowl of soup in a bowl (2 photos)

Storage and Freezing Instructions:

  • Storage: This Cream of Zucchini Soup can be stored in a refrigerator for up to 3-4 days in an airtight container. Before sealing the container, ensure the soup has reached room temperature. 
  • Freezing: You can freeze it by bringing the pureed soup to room temperature and sealing it into a freezer-safe airtight container. This soup can be frozen for up to 30 days. To thaw, remove it from the freezer a day before and let it thaw in the refrigerator. Heat it in a large saucepan before serving.

Variations:

If you are looking to change up this recipe, there are some easy adjustments that you can make. This soup easily fits into many diets, so there is a delicious option for everyone!

  • Yellow Squash: If you have some yellow squash in your garden, you may opt to make a zucchini yellow squash soup. Replace 2 of your zucchinis with 2 yellow squash. 
  • For a Keto Zucchini Soup: Replace the potato with ½ cup of heavy whipping cream. When your boiling is near completion, add the heavy whipping cream, stir, and bring to a boil.

FAQs:

Do You Peel Zucchini for Soup?

I do not peel the zucchini when making this soup. Fresh zucchinis during zucchini season have thin, tender skin, so you can skip the peeling. Just remember, if you choose to leave the skin on, thoroughly wash before chopping. 

Can You Freeze Cream of Zucchini Soup?

Yes, you can freeze this easy zucchini soup! Simply bring to room temperature, and seal in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Your soup is then ready to be stored in a freezer for up to 30 days. 

Other Vegetable Soup Recipes You Might Like:

If you are looking for other creamy vegetable soups made with simple ingredients, check out some of my other reader favorite recipes below:

If you try this Cream of Zucchini recipe or any other one of our zucchini recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Person spooning a bowl of cream of zucchini soup
Print

Cream of Zucchini Soup Recipe

A healthy zucchini soup recipe made with 5 ingredients in one pot in 30 minutes. This is the best way to use your garden zucchini. Serve it warm or cold this easy soup is guaranteed to please.
Course Soup
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 74kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 medium sized zucchini (approximately 1 ½ lbs) peeled & cut into 3 inch pieces
  • 1 small onion peeled and cut into half
  • 1 medium-sized 5 oz. Yukon gold potato, peeled and cut into chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 4 cups of vegetable broth or chicken broth*
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Optional Toppings:

  • 1 cup Greek Yogurt Sauce or a few dollops of sour cream
  • 4 tablespoons Lemon Juice Freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoon fresh dill or fresh parsley chopped
  • extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Place zucchini, onion, potato, garlic, vegetable broth, and salt and pepper in a medium size saucepan with a lid over medium-high heat.
  • Bring to a boil and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes until zucchini and potato are softened and tender.
  • Off the heat, using an immersion blender (regular blender or food processor), puree soup until creamy and no chunks remaining.
  • Garnish with a dollop of yogurt sauce, sour cream, a drizzle of olive oil, or a squeeze of lemon juice and fresh herbs.

Video

Notes

  • Do You Peel Zucchini for Soup? I do not peel the zucchini when making this soup. Fresh zucchinis during zucchini season have thin, tender skin, so you can skip the peeling. Just remember, if you choose to leave the skin on, thoroughly wash before chopping.
  • Use chicken broth:  I wanted my zucchini soup vegan so I used vegetable broth as the liquid in the recipe. However, if you are okay with it not being vegan/vegetarian, you can make your zucchini soup with chicken broth. If you decide to do so, simply replace the 4 cups of vegetable broth with 2 cups of chicken broth and 2 cups of water. Avoid using 4 cups of chicken broth, as the chicken taste will overpower the rest of the dish. With this being said, if you plan to serve this soup cold, it is highly recommended that you use vegetable stock. This will bring out the fresh flavors of the vegetables used.  
  • Storage: This Cream of Zucchini Soup can be stored in a refrigerator for up to 3-4 days in an airtight container. Before sealing the container, ensure the soup has reached room temperature. 
  • Freezing & thawing: You can freeze it by bringing the pureed soup to room temperature and sealing it into a freezer-safe airtight container. This soup can be frozen for up to 30 days. To thaw, remove it from the freezer a day before and let it thaw in the refrigerator. Heat it in a large saucepan before serving.
  • The calorie information below does not reflect any calories coming from the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 74kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1538mg | Potassium: 632mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1017IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg

This Zucchini Soup recipe was originally published on September 2013. It has been updated with new photos and helpful information on June 2021.

The post Cream of Zucchini Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-soup/feed/ 8
Turkish Red Lentil Soup – Kirmizi Mercimek Corbasi https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-red-lentil-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-red-lentil-soup/#comments Wed, 08 Sep 2021 07:31:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4764 As soon as the temperatures start going down, we switch from simple salads to veggie-packed soup recipes like this Turkish lentil soup. If you have ever visited Turkey, chances are that you know this is one of the most popular Turkish Soup recipe. In the archives of this website, there are many different soup recipes that you can make that are similar in nutrition and style, such as my Green...

The post Turkish Red Lentil Soup – Kirmizi Mercimek Corbasi appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

As soon as the temperatures start going down, we switch from simple salads to veggie-packed soup recipes like this Turkish lentil soup. If you have ever visited Turkey, chances are that you know this is one of the most popular Turkish Soup recipe.

In the archives of this website, there are many different soup recipes that you can make that are similar in nutrition and style, such as my Green Lentil Soup, Carrot Ginger Soup, and Vegan Sweet Potato Soup. So, if you are a fan of veggie-packed creamy soups, you are in the right place.

Turkish red lentil soup in a bowl topped off with croutons, sumac, and parsley.

Why You Should Try This Recipe 

This hearty soup recipe is a must-have for days when you want something quick and easy but nutritious at the same time. It is also:

  • Quick and Easy To Make: This Turkish lentil soup recipe requires 6 ingredients, is made in one pot, and takes about 30 minutes to cook so you don’t have to worry about taking up copious amounts of time and effort for this delicious meal. 
  • New to red lentils? No problem: Red lentils are a staple of most Turkish kitchens but if you are new to cooking with red lentils, this recipe is an easy place to start! The simple steps that I will go into detail below will make cooking with red lentils a breeze.
  • Diet-Friendly: In addition to being highly nutritious, thanks to lentils, this heart-warming soup is also an excellent option for those looking for a vegan and gluten-free meal.  

Ingredient Notes

To make this Traditional Turkish red lentil soup recipe, gather yellow onion, red lentils, garlic, potatoes, carrot, vegetable stock, and salt and black pepper.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in small bowls

While those are the basic ingredients you will need, below I am including a few add-ins and swaps you can use:

  • Tomato Paste or Red Pepper Paste: If you want to add a little more color or spice to your soup, consider adding a tablespoon of tomato paste or red pepper paste. 
  • Chicken Broth: Although this Turkish lentil soup is vegan by default, you can always substitute vegetable broth for chicken stock. If you go with chicken stock, I would recommend using 4 cups of stock and 4 cups of water, as all chicken stock might be a little bit overpowering.
  • Additional Seasoning: If you want to add a little extra flavor to your soup, try incorporating fresh herbs and spices such as fresh parsley, fresh mint, ground cumin, and/or red pepper flakes.

How to Make It?

This velvety Red Lentil Turkish soup recipe is easy to make and requires just a few basic steps. Here is how I make it:

  1. Prepare Ingredients: Cut up your onion and carrots (size can vary based on preference) and mince 3 cloves of garlic. Next, rinse your lentils in a colander under cold running water. Finally, cut a small potato into 1-inch cubes. 
Person showing the steps to make red lentil stew
  1. Combine Ingredients & cook: Combine onion, carrots, garlic, lentils, and potato in a large pot or large saucepan. Add vegetable stock, salt, and pepper. Give it a quick stir. Put the lid on and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn down the heat to low and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until a knife inserted in one of the vegetables comes in and out easily.
Person showing how to cook turkish lentil soup in four steps
  1. Blend: Off the heat, blend using an immersion blender (aka hand blender) until it is smooth and creamy. Heat the soup for one additional minute just to make sure it is nice and warm.
  2. Check for Seasoning: Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Ladle soup into soup bowls. If you prefer, top each bowl off with croutons and a pinch of sumac or red pepper flakes/Aleppo pepper.

How to Serve

There are many traditional ways to serve this soup. Below you will find my favorite flavor-enhancing ways to serve this simple dish. 

  • Lemon Wedges: The traditional Turkish lentil soup is always served with lemon wedges on the side as a squeeze of lemon juice truly takes it to a whole new level and brightens the flavors.
  • Crusty Bread or Croutons: Serve it with a few slices of Brioche, No Knead Bread or Challah. Or go with croutons.
  • Aleppo Pepper Oil – The Butter Drizzle: While it takes a few extra minutes to prepare, drizzling it with melted butter is not only the traditional way of serving it but also a wonderful addition to up the flavors of this red lentil stew. To do so, warm up half a stick of butter (4 tablespoons) in a small skillet over low heat until lightly browned. Add in 1/2 teaspoon cayenne pepper (or Aleppo pepper, if you have it). Then right before serving, drizzle each bowl with a tablespoon of the butter drizzle. With that being said, if you are short on time, you can finish it off with a drizzle of olive oil as well.

How to Store and Freeze

  • Storage: If you have leftovers, bring your lentil soup to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. When kept refrigerated, your soup should remain fresh and tasty for up to 4 days.
  • Freezing: To freeze, bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container and freeze upto 2 months.
  • To Thaw: Remove it from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. Heat in a small saucepan before serving.
A bowl of Turkish Lentil Soup served with lemon wedges

Expert Tips 

Here are a few helpful tips to help make the best red lentil soup possible:

  • Consistency: I followed in the footsteps of my mom and used 8 cups of liquid. However, if you want your soup to be thicker, you can use less liquid or if you want it to be thinner you can add in more. Either way, I recommend making adjustments in half a cup increments.
  • Texture: It is easy to adjust the texture of this lentil soup to your taste. If you prefer your soup to be silkier, simply blend it longer. If you prefer a chunkier version, blend until it reaches the consistency you like. 
  • No immersion blender? No problem: If you do not have an immersion blender, a regular blender or food processor will also work. Just be sure to be careful if you are using one of these alternatives, as the soup will be super hot.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Should I Soak Red Lentils Before Cooking?

No. There is no need to soak your red lentils before cooking this soup because they already cook so quickly. As long as you have given your lentils a thorough rinse, you do not need to do any extra work.

Should I rinse red lentils before making soup?

Yes, you should. Simply place it in a colander and rinse under cold running water for a minute or so before using it in your recipe. Taking a few extra minutes to rinse lentils helps eliminate any dirt or debris that may be hiding amongst the lentils

How Many Calories Are in a Cup of Red Lentil Soup?

A cup of Turkish lentil soup is about 193 calories without any of the optional toppings.

Is lentil soup healthy?

Yes, it is. According to Healthline, lentils are highly nutritious, with high levels of fiber, minerals, and vitamins. They are also high in polyphenols (active compounds that fight against harmful agents in the body), which have strong antioxidant and anti-inflammatory properties.

Other Turkish Dishes You May Like:

In most Turkish households, this soup is served as a starter. If you want to dip your toes into Turkish cooking and turn it into a whole meal, here is a simple (beginner-friendly) menu to help you achieve that.

If you try this Red Lentil Turkish Soup recipe or any other one of our soup recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Turkish red lentil soup in a bowl from close up
Print

Turkish Red Lentil Soup Recipe (Kirmizi Mercimek Corbasi)

This Turkish Red Lentil Soup recipe is a heartwarming, vegan, and gluten-free soup you can make in one pot in 30 minutes. It is also one of the most popular Middle Eastern soup recipes that happens to be so easy to make.
Course Soup
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 193kcal

Ingredients

For the soup:

  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped
  • 1 1/4 cup red lentils picked over and rinsed
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 small potato cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 large carrots – chopped approximately 1/2 cup chopped
  • 8 cups vegetable stock or a combination of water and stock
  • 2 teaspoons salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper

Optional Toppings

  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley chopped
  • 1 cup croutons
  • lemon wedges
  • 1 tbsp sumac
  • Pinch of Aleppo Pepper, Urfa Chili or red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Add onion, red lentils, garlic, potato, and carrot in a medium size heavy bottom pot. Pour in the stock.
  • Bring it to a boil in medium-high heat. Turn down the heat to low and let it cook until lentils are softened and potato cubes and carrots are cooked, 10-15 min. You can check doneness by inserting a knife in one of the vegetables. If it comes in and out easily, it should be good to go.
  • Off the heat, puree the soup using an immersion blender or do it batches using a food processor or blender.
  • Put it back on the heat, bring it to a one last boil.
  • Taste for seasoning and add if necessary. Ladle into bowls.
  • Serve it immediately with croutons, chopped parsley, and lemon wedges (optional).

Video

Notes

  • This recipe was originally published in 2014. It has been updated with new images since then. In the earlier version, I didn’t have carrots in the recipe, but lately, I like to add them because of the flavor and color. If you watch the video that was published earlier, you will see that I didn’t use carrots but please know that you can make this soup with or without carrots.
  • Optional Butter drizzleWhile it takes a few extra minutes to prepare, drizzling it with melted butter is not only the traditional way of serving it but also a wonderful addition to up the flavors of this red lentil soup. To do so, warm up half a stick of salted butter (4 tablespoons) in a small skillet over low heat until lightly browned. Add in 1/2 teaspoon cayenne pepper (or Aleppo pepper, if you have it). Then right before serving, drizzle each bowl with a tablespoon of the butter drizzle.
  • Consistency: I followed in the footsteps of my mom and used 8 cups of liquid. However, if you want your soup to be thicker, you can use less liquid or if you want it to be thinner you can add in more. Either way, I recommend making adjustments in half a cup increments.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container. When kept refrigerated, your soup should remain fresh and tasty for up to 4 days.
  • Freezing: To freeze, bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • To Thaw: Remove it from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. Heat in a small saucepan before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 193kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 2053mg | Potassium: 571mg | Fiber: 13g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 959IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 3mg

This Turkish Lentil Soup recipe was originally published in April 2014. It has been updated with new photos and more helpful information in September 2021.

The post Turkish Red Lentil Soup – Kirmizi Mercimek Corbasi appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-red-lentil-soup/feed/ 26
Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/vegetarian-stuffed-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetarian-stuffed-eggplant/#comments Tue, 10 Aug 2021 18:56:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43350 This Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant is one of the most delectable, satisfying, and healthy vegetarian eggplant recipes out there. Not only does it boast piquant spice, creamy eggplant, and fresh tomato, but it also makes a gorgeous table presentation—perfect for summer dinner parties. A vegetarian version of my karniyarik recipe, this simple summer dish will satisfy picky eaters and special diets alike. Make this easy, low-calorie recipe for an authentic Mediterranean...

The post Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant is one of the most delectable, satisfying, and healthy vegetarian eggplant recipes out there. Not only does it boast piquant spice, creamy eggplant, and fresh tomato, but it also makes a gorgeous table presentation—perfect for summer dinner parties.

A vegetarian version of my karniyarik recipe, this simple summer dish will satisfy picky eaters and special diets alike. Make this easy, low-calorie recipe for an authentic Mediterranean feast any day of the week.

vegetable stuffed aubergine in a baking dish

Why You Should Try This Recipe

Low-fat, healthy (because eggplants are packed with antioxidants), and bursting with garden-fresh flavor, there are countless reasons to love this easy stuffed eggplant recipe.

  • Visually stunning and the perfect recipe for summer, these baked stuffed eggplant halves work as both a flavorful side for meat-based main dishes and a filling vegetarian meal.
  • Authentic Mediterranean cuisine is a cinch to make with the herby bulgur wheat and the zesty tahini sauce used in these filled eggplant halves.
  • It can be easily made vegan! You can transform this recipe into a scrumptious vegan stuffed eggplant dish simply by omitting the tahini yogurt.

Ingredients

Only the most wholesome and appetizing ingredients go into this vegetable stuffed aubergine (what they call eggplant in the U.K. or brinjal in Asia), making your ingredient checklist nutritious and delicious.

Eggplants

Globe halved eggplants on a sheet pan

When considering the size of the eggplants, I recommend using 3-4 globe eggplants—the large, round type of eggplant most common in U.S. grocery stores. If you can’t find those, smaller eggplants or medium eggplant will work, too. Just be sure to select ones that are heavy, firm, and unbruised. New to buying eggplants? Be sure to check out my article on the different types of eggplants.

Bulgur Pilaf

Ingredients for the filling

For the bulgar pilaf filling, gather together butter, onion, green pepper (or red bell pepper), tomato paste, cumin, coarse bulgur, fresh tomato (or cherry tomatoes), chickpeas, water, salt, and black pepper.

Garnish /Sauce

It is optional, but you can drizzle Tahini Yogurt Sauce—a vegetarian eggplant dressing made with fresh lemon juice, tahini, and yogurt—for a kick of tangy flavor.

And of course, garnish it with a few tablespoons of roughly chopped Italian parsley.

How To Make Stuffed Eggplant – Vegetarian Version

There’s no secret to making authentic Mediterranean stuffed eggplant recipes like this. Other than the fact that the steps look like they are a lot, but if you multitask, you’ll see that making this simple dish is a breeze.

We can divide the whole process into 3 parts:

Roast Eggplant Halves

I shared a detailed post on how to roast eggplant halves should you want to see it in more detail and get all your questions answered. However, here is what you need to do in a nutshell:

Person showing how to roast eggplant halves with four photos
  1. Score the eggplant: Cut eggplant in half lengthwise. Score each half with a knife in a cross-hatch pattern. 
  2. Salt & Rest: Transfer the eggplant on a sheet pan and sprinkle with an even layer of salt. Wait a half hour and preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. After 30 minutes, gently squeeze excess water from the eggplant halves and pat them dry with a paper towel. 
  3. Oil eggplant halves: Brush the halves with an even coating of olive oil and place them cut face-down on the baking tray. 
  4. Roast: Bake them for 45-60 minutes, or until they collapse and turn golden brown. Remove the cooked eggplant from the oven and let them cool before assembling.

Make Bulgur Pilaf

We are using my Bulgur Pilaf recipe here. I find that it pairs well with the roasted smokey eggplant. Below is how to make it in a nutshell. Be sure to make it while the eggplants to save on time.

Person showing how to make eggplant stuffing
  1. Saute vegetables & spices: Heat oil in a medium saucepan over moderate heat. Sauteé the onion and pepper until they’re translucent, then add in the tomato paste. After a minute of constant stirring, add in the cumin, bulgur, tomatoes, chickpeas, water, salt, and pepper. 
  2. Cook: Increase heat until the mixture boils, then cover it with a lid and reduce the heat to low. Simmer the bulgur for 10-12 minutes, or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  3. Rest & Fluff: Let the bulgur rest for 10 minutes, and then fluff it with a fork. 

If you are after a more simple version, you can check my How To Cook Bulgur post to make a basic bulgur recipe to stuff your eggplants.

Assemble:

To assemble the dish:

Person showing How To Make Stuffed Eggplant in four images
  1. Prep for assembly: Place baked eggplant boats on a baking sheet. They would be quite snuggly, which is fine. Get as many as you can in there.
  2. Stuff: Spoon each eggplant half with a heaping portion of the bulgur pilaf. 
  3. Garnish & Drizzle: Sprinkle each with fresh parsley and, if desired, drizzle them with tahini yogurt sauce.

How to Store

You don’t have to let a single bite of this lovely recipe go to waste. Whether you’re saving leftovers for later or doing meal prep, say goodbye to last-minute dinners with this easy dish!

  • Storage: In an airtight container, baked stuffed eggplant can last up to 4 days in the fridge. Just make sure you bring the aubergine halves to room temperature before storing them. To reheat, simply preheat the oven temperature to 300 degrees F. and cook the halves for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Make Ahead: To eliminate the stress of weeknight cooking, you can make this dish in advance. Just cook the eggplant and bulgur wheat pilaf, store them in separate airtight containers, and assemble the eggplant halves right before serving. To reheat, bake the assembled halves in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Both the flesh of the eggplant and eggplant shells are known to lose their shape and texture once exposed to extreme cold. To keep your eggplant skin as fresh as possible, I don’t recommend freezing them.

Expert Tips:

With these handy tips and tricks, you can learn how to make aubergine recipes exactly how you like them—and save time on meal prep, too!

  • Save time: Roasting the eggplant halves a day in advance is an easy and delicious way to cut your cooking time in half.
  • Make Your Serving Picture-Perfect: This Mediterranean stuffed eggplant looks absolutely exquisite when you arrange all the halves on a single serving platter. Plus, it’ll make assembling, serving, and taking pictures of this meal a breeze.
  • Try a Gluten-Free Version: To make this stuffed eggplant vegetarian and gluten free, try my recipe for Lemon Quinoa—a savory, light, and citrusy filling.
Baked stuffed eggplant is being drizzled with tahini sauce

How to Serve

Easy vegetarian stuffed eggplant recipes are some of the most versatile dishes out there. Flavorful yet balanced, these recipes can be served in any way that satisfies your taste buds.

  • Serve filled eggplant halves by themselves for a satisfying, nutritious, and robust vegetarian or vegan main dish.
  • Use this multipurpose recipe as a peppery side dish for meat-based mains. You can’t go wrong when you serve this delicious recipe alongside hearty Roasted Cornish Hens, Greek Yogurt Chicken, vibrant Meatball and Potato Bake, and—my favorite meatball recipe, Kofte.

Other Mediterranean Eggplant Recipes You Might Like:

Vegetarian Stuffed Aubergines in a baking dish from the top view
Print

Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant Recipe

Mediterranean-Inspired Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant Recipe – Roasted eggplant halves filled with bulgur pilaf and drizzled with tahini yogurt sauce.
Course Vegetarian Main Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Cooling time for eggplants 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 331kcal

Ingredients

For The Eggplants

  • 4 large globe eggplants cut vertically in half
  • 2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil

For The Bulgur Wheat Pilaf

  • 2 tbsp vegetable oil or butter
  • 1 onion medium sized/chopped (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 green pepper seeded – (jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work) approximately 1/2 cup
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups boiling water or you can use vegetable stock
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Optional

Instructions

To Roast Eggplant Halves:

  • Rinse eggplant under cold water and dry with a kitchen towel or paper towels.
  • Cut eggplant in half lengthwise. Then using the tip of a knife, score the flesh into a diamond cross-hatch pattern going about an inch deep making sure to not pierce the skin.
  • Transfer the eggplant halves cut side up onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Season evenly with the kosher salt. Let them sit for 30 minutes on the sheet pan.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F (or 200 degrees C).
  • Over a kitchen sink, gently squeeze the eggplants to get the extra moisture out. Pat-dry the cut face of the eggplants using a paper towel.
  • Brush the halves evenly with olive oil. Arrange eggplants face down on the baking sheet. Bake in the preheated oven for 45-60 minutes or until the eggplant collapses and the bottom side turns golden brown.
  • Let it cool on the counter for at least 20 minutes. Turn the cut side up and transfer them onto a serving platter to stuff.

To Make The Stuffing:

  • While the eggplant halves are roasting, make the bulgur pilaf. Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion and pepper and saute until translucent, 4 minutes. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or until thoroughly incorporated into the vegetables and thickened.
  • Add in ground cumin, coarse bulgur, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season with salt and pepper.
  • Give it a stir, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  • Off the heat, let it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on) and fluff it with a fork.

To Assemble:

  • Fill each roasted eggplant half with bulgur pilaf.
  • Sprinkle with parsley and drizzle with tahini yogurt sauce if using. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • You can save time by roasting the eggplant halves a day in advance and storing them in an airtight container. When ready to stuff  them, heat them in a 300 F oven for 10-15 minutes.
  • Arrange the eggplant halves in a baking dish to make it easier to stuff. 
  • If you want to make this recipe gluten-free try it filling the eggplant halves with my Lemon Quinoa recipe instead.
  • If you don’t care for the Tahini Yogurt Dressing, you can also use my Greek Yogurt Dressing
  • Storage: In an airtight container, baked stuffed eggplant can last up to 4 days in the fridge. Just make sure you bring the aubergine halves to room temperature before storing them. To reheat, simply preheat the oven temperature to 300 degrees F. and cook the halves for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Make Ahead: To eliminate the stress of weeknight cooking, you can make this dish in advance. Just cook the eggplant and bulgur wheat pilaf, store them in separate airtight containers, and assemble the eggplant halves right before serving. To reheat, bake the assembled halves in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes, or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Both the flesh of the eggplant and eggplant shells are known to lose their shape and texture once exposed to extreme cold. To keep your eggplant skin as fresh as possible, I don’t recommend freezing them.

Nutrition

Calories: 331kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Sodium: 1825mg | Potassium: 343mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 616IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetarian-stuffed-eggplant/feed/ 16
Karniyarik – Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:43:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=942 If you have a hankering for authentic Middle Eastern food, this classic Turkish eggplant dish, known as karniyarik, is just what you need. Referred to as aubergines in the UK and brinjal in Asia, eggplants make for a breathtaking table presentation. You’ll need a fork and a camera after seeing the deep purple, vibrant reds, and verdant greens of this Turkish Stuffed Eggplant dish. Whether you serve this freezer-friendly dinner...

The post Karniyarik – Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have a hankering for authentic Middle Eastern food, this classic Turkish eggplant dish, known as karniyarik, is just what you need. Referred to as aubergines in the UK and brinjal in Asia, eggplants make for a breathtaking table presentation. You’ll need a fork and a camera after seeing the deep purple, vibrant reds, and verdant greens of this Turkish Stuffed Eggplant dish.

Whether you serve this freezer-friendly dinner on a bed of bulgur wheat pilaf or with a side of creamy tzatziki, it’s bound to make mouths water. If you’re still craving Turkish cuisine after this picture-perfect meal, there are so many other recipes to try! You’ll rave about my garlicky Eggplant Yogurt Dip, hearty Simit Recipe, and spicy Turkish Kofta Recipe.

Karniyarik recipe garnished with tomatoes and parsley

What is Karniyarik?

Karniyarik is a popular Turkish eggplant dish usually made during the summer months when eggplants are in season.

The original recipe is made by first frying whole eggplants and then filling them with a ground beef mixture. They are then finished in the oven after being drizzled with a quick tomato sauce.

Our version of this popular eggplant dish is made healthier (and easier) by roasting whole eggplants in the oven rather than frying them in oil.

Why Should You Try This Recipe

This Turkish ground beef stuffed eggplant dish is equal parts stunning and scrumptious. With so much to love, it’s impossible not to fall head over heels for this Middle Eastern main course.

  • Visually impressive and easy to serve, this recipe makes for a gorgeous table presentation. Wow your dinner party guests the next time you treat them to this one-portion meal.
  • Out of all the Turkish aubergine recipes, this one has stood the test of time. In fact, it was one of the most popular eggplant dish among Ottoman Empire royalty!
  • Turkish eggplant recipes are a great way to eat from your garden this eggplant season without boring your taste buds.
  • Say yes to healthy eating with this nutritious take on a classic. Though the original recipe uses fried eggplant, my version uses whole roasted eggplants (or even fire-roasted eggplants) instead.

Ingredients

Because this Turkish brinjal dish uses so many home-grown ingredients, you can eat fresh without a last-minute trip to the grocery store.

Eggplants:

For this recipe, you’ll need 5 medium-sized eggplants. To make your Turkish aubergine recipes as authentic as possible, try to find eggplants that are long and lean. However, amongst all the different kinds of eggplants, globe eggplants (the ones I used in the pictures) are the easiest to find so I use them in my recipe.

If they are too large to fit in one baking dish, you may have to roast them in separate sheet pans.

Globe eggplants on a sheet pan lined with aluminum foil

Pro Tip: When you’re on the hunt for the perfect eggplants, try to select ones that are heavy for their size, firm to the touch, and not bruised. Also, try to choose eggplants that are of similar size to one another to ensure even cooking.

The Stuffing – Meat Filling Mixture:

Stuffed eggplant filling ingredients

For the ground beef filling, gather olive oil, chopped onion, ground cumin, bell peppers, ground beef, garlic, diced tomatoes, salt, black pepper, Italian parsley, hot water, and tomato paste.

How To Make Karniyarik

Whether you’re new to Turkish cuisine or someone who is interested in the flavors of the Middle East, you won’t believe how simple it is to make this Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef. 

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. and line a baking sheet with aluminum foil.
person poking eggplants before roasting in the oven
  1. Prepare the eggplant: Wash the eggplants in the sink and dry them off with paper towels. Position them on a lined baking sheet and poke 7-10 holes in each with a fork.
  2. Roast the eggplant in the oven: Place the eggplants in the preheated oven and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them over once or twice to ensure even roasting. Then, remove the eggplants and let them cool for a couple minutes on the counter. Reduce the oven temperature to 350 degrees F.
Person showing how to make ground beef mixture for Turkish eggplant
  1. Prepare the meat mixture: While the eggplant is roasting, make the ground beef stuffing. Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Then, add onion, ground cumin, pepper, and ground beef. Stir frequently for 10-12 minutes before adding garlic. Then, cook for 30 more seconds. 
  2. Cook the stuffing: Add in the tomatoes, a little salt, and pepper. Bring the ground beef mixture to boil over medium heat before turning it down to medium-low. Let the stuffing simmer for 10-15 minutes (until the meat is fully cooked), and add more seasoning as necessary. Remove mixture from heat and add chopped parsley.
Step by step photos of how to make karniyarik recipe
  1. Assemble: Mix the water and tomato sauce in a measuring cup, and place eggplants in a large casserole dish. Use a knife to create a slit belly in the center of each eggplant. Fill the sliced eggplants with a heaping portion of the meat stuffing and spoon 2-3 tablespoons of the tomato sauce mixture over each eggplant’s top. Pour the remaining mixture into the bottom of the baking dish. Garnish each eggplant with a few tomato slices.
stuffed eggplants garnished with tomatoes in a casserole dish before going into the oven
  1. Bake: Cover the casserole dish with aluminum foil and bake for 15 minutes. Then, remove the foil and bake for 10 minutes more. 
  2. Serve: Garnish with fresh parsley and serve.

Note: When making this karniyarik recipe, there are many different ways to cook the eggplant. For more detailed instructions, visit my guide on Whole Roasted Eggplant in Oven. Or, you can visit my recipe for Fire Roasted Eggplants to add a gentle smoky flavor to your meal.

How to Serve This Turkish Eggplant Recipe

Eggplant dishes taste spectacular on their own, but they’re utterly irresistible when served alongside my other classic Turkish sides.

  • Turkish Bulgur Pilaf: Every flavor in my hearty Turkish eggplants comes to life when served on a bed of herby, vegan bulgur.
  • Tzatziki Sauce: There’s no better pair than creamy, tangy tzatziki sauce and meaty Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef.
  • Piyaz Salad: Soft beans, juicy tomatoes, and zesty citrus make the ultimate side dish for this summer-ready meal.
Turkish baked eggplant filled with ground beef served on a plate

How to Store & Freeze

Just because you meal prep doesn’t mean you can’t eat five-star cuisine on a weeknight. Enliven dinner any day of the week with this storage-friendly meal.

  • Storage: When stored in an airtight container, leftovers can stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. and bake in a casserole dish for 15-20 minutes.
  • Freezing: Bring the stuffed eggplants to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Because karniyarik freezes so well, you can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 
  • Thawing: Remove the karniyarik from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the stuffed eggplant on a baking sheet and bake for 15-20 minutes or until fully warmed.

Other Ways to Prepare Eggplant

One of the best things about eggplant is how many ways there are to prepare them! Cook your garden goods to perfection using each different version listed below.

  • Frying: Want to add richness to your Turkish stuffed eggplant? Try frying your eggplant the authentic Turkish way, and every plate will be licked clean. Instead of roasting the eggplants, cut a slit in the eggplants and soak them in salted water for 30 minutes. Then, squeeze the eggplants dry with a clean kitchen towel. Heat some vegetable oil in a deep frying pan and fry the eggplants evenly on each side, until they’re soft and browned. Finally, remove the fried eggplant from the pan and rest it on a paper towel to absorb excess oil.
  • Roasted Halved Eggplants: You can also roast eggplant halves in the oven and stuff each half one by one with the meat sauce.
  • Fire roasting: A great way to add smokiness to this Turkish summer classic is to roast the eggplant before adding the filling. Just place the eggplants on a gas stove, turn them with a set of tongs, and roast them until fully softened. Once cooked, set the eggplants on a casserole dish. Slice open the belly section of the eggplant and fill it with the stuffing. Follow the rest of the recipe as written.
    For full instructions, advice, and tips on how to make this fiery substitute, follow my Fire Roasted Eggplant recipe.

Expert Tips

Even new chefs can make stuffed aubergines like a pro. With these simple substitutions, you can have a tasty dish that’s delicious and new every time you make it!

  • Use ground lamb instead of ground beef for a lamb aubergine recipe bursting with a robust, tender flavor.
  • Don’t have fresh tomatoes on hand? Try canned tomatoes instead. Only one cup is necessary to make this mouthwatering Turkish meal.
  • Size of the eggplant: You may have to adjust the amount of the meat sauce depending on the size of your eggplant. If yours are larger, use more ground meat to ensure that you have enough filling.
  • If you prefer a meat free version of stuffed eggplants, be sure to try my Mediterranean Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe.

FAQs

What does karniyarik mean in Turkish?

“Karin” means belly and “yarik” means opening. So, karniyarik can roughly be translated as “With the belly open”

How is karniyarik different than imam bayildi (Imam Fainted) recipe?

Turkish Imam fainted is the vegetarian version of karniyarik. While it is made in a very similar way, instead of stuffing the eggplants with a ground beef mixture you stuff it with an onion and tomato mixture.

What is eggplant in Turkish?

In Turkish, eggplant is called patlican.

More Turkish Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like:

Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe close up
Print

Karniyarik Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe

This Turkish Stuffed Eggplant recipe, also known as Karniyarik, is made by stuffing roasted eggplants with tasty ground beef, pepper and tomatoes filling. Originated from the Ottoman cuisine, this is a delicious way to use eggplants that are in abundance during the summer months.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 5 portions
Calories 394kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 medium sized eggplants preferably similar in size
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 medium-size bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1/2 lb ground beef 80/20
  • 4 cloves garlic thinly chopped
  • 1 cup diced tomatoes plus more as garnish on top
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for seasoning the belly of eggplants
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/2 cup Italian Parsley chopped more as a garnish
  • 1 cup hot water
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste

Instructions

To Roast The Eggplants:

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil.
  • Using a fork, poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant.
  • Place them on the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes to an hour making sure to turn once or twice for even roasting.
  • Take it out of the oven and let it cool on the counter.
  • Turn the heat down to 350 degrees F.

To Make The Meat Sauce:

  • Meanwhile, make the meat sauce. Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat.
  • Add onion, ground cumin, pepper, and ground beef and cook, stirring frequently, for 10-12 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add in the tomatoes, salt, and pepper. Bring it to a boil over medium heat, turn down the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 10-15 minutes or until the meat is fully cooked. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Off the heat, stir in a cup of chopped parsley.

To Assemble:

  • Mix together the water and tomato paste in a measuring cup.
  • Place roasted eggplant in a large casserole dish. It might be tight and that is okay.
  • Using a knife, gently cut a small opening in the "belly" of each eggplant. Lightly season the belly of each eggplant with salt (use 1/2 teaspoon salt in total.)
  • Fill the opening of each eggplant with the meat mixture letting it mound through the slit.
  • Spoon the tomato sauce & water mixture over the stuffed eggplant. You should use 2-3 tablespoons of the mixture for each eggplant. Pour the remaining mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish.
  • To garnish, slice a large tomato (or two small ones) into 6 thin slices and place a few slices on top of each eggplant, like you see in the photos.
  • Cover with aluminum foil. Bake for 15 minutes. Remove the foil and bake for another 10 minutes.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Eggplant: You would have the adjust the amount of meat sauce based on the size of your eggplants. Mine were 1/2 to 2/3 pounds each. However, if yours are larger, I recommend using 2/3 pounds of ground beef.
  • Storage: When stored in an airtight container, leftovers can stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. and bake in a casserole dish for 15-20 minutes.
  • Freezing: Bring the stuffed eggplants to room temperature and place them in an airtight container. Because karniyarik freezes so well, you can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 
  • Thawing: Remove the stuffed eggplants from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. When ready to serve, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Place the stuffed eggplant on a baking sheet and bake for 15-20 minutes or until fully warmed.
  • Use ground lamb instead of ground beef for a lamb aubergine recipe bursting with a robust, tender flavor.
  • Don’t have fresh tomatoes on hand? Try canned tomatoes instead. Only one cup is necessary to make this mouthwatering Turkish meal.

Nutrition

Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 396mg | Potassium: 2107mg | Fiber: 23g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 1287IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 4mg

This recipe was originally published in July 2013 but updated with helpful notes in August 2021.

The post Karniyarik – Turkish Stuffed Eggplant Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-eggplant-karniyarik/feed/ 36
Eggplant Yogurt Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4161 This Eggplant Yogurt Recipe is a Turkish appetizer that will make your mouth water with every bite. Fire-roasted eggplant adds a smoky flavor to this tangy and bold dish, and fresh lemon juice gives it a tantalizing citrus bite. Whether you serve it as a side dish or as an eggplant yogurt dip with pita chips, this recipe is guaranteed to satisfy! Spain has tapas and Italy has antipasti, but...

The post Eggplant Yogurt Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This Eggplant Yogurt Recipe is a Turkish appetizer that will make your mouth water with every bite. Fire-roasted eggplant adds a smoky flavor to this tangy and bold dish, and fresh lemon juice gives it a tantalizing citrus bite. Whether you serve it as a side dish or as an eggplant yogurt dip with pita chips, this recipe is guaranteed to satisfy!

Spain has tapas and Italy has antipasti, but in my opinion, Middle Eastern mezze is the most delicious. If you’re craving even more appetizing mezze recipes, you’ll love my Muhammara Recipe, Roasted Eggplant Red Pepper Spread, and Hummus Dip. You can also try my Yoghurt Dressing and Turkish Stuffed Eggplant for even more Turkish Cuisine inspiration.

Aubergine yogurt recipe in a bowl garnished with parsley

Why You Should Try This Recipe

With all the best flavors of Mediterranean cuisine, this eggplant and Greek yogurt recipe will be your new go-to dish to serve at parties and in your own home!

  • This recipe is a great alternative to Baba Ganoush if you don’t have tahini on hand or simply want to try out a new Middle Eastern spread.
  • You can serve this recipe as Turkish eggplant dip or as a side dish, depending on how you present it.
  • Take the stress out of meal prep by making this dish up to 2 days in advance.

Ingredients

Who knew eating around the world could be so easy? This authentic Israeli dish is just as scrumptious as other Yotam Ottolenghi dips, but it only uses a handful of pantry staples.

Ingredients for eggplant dip with yogurt

Eggplants

Whether you have globe eggplants or long and lean Japanese eggplant, both work perfectly for this recipe. Just be sure to adjust how many eggplants you gather depending on their size. You’ll need 4 medium eggplants or 2 large ones.

Pro Tip: The best eggplants are those that are firm, heavy for their size, shiny on the outside, and unbruised. Choosing the freshest produce will ensure that your Turkish grilled eggplant tastes as smoky, tender, and non-bitter as possible. (Source)

Greek Yogurt Mixture

For the yogurt mixture, gather Greek yogurt, garlic cloves, olive oil, fresh lemon juice, salt, black pepper, and Italian parsley.

How To Make It

If you love the taste of Turkish smoked eggplant, with a little planning, you will find that the steps of making this easy side dish are a breeze.

Photos showing how to roast brinjal on stove top
  1. Fire roast the eggplants: Turn the gas stove on low and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Use a pair of tongs to turn the eggplants every 3-5 minutes until they’re blackened and soft. Remove them from the flame and cover them with aluminum foil to steam further. (For more instructions, tips, and tricks be sure to check out my guide on How To Cook Eggplant on Gas Stove)
    Alternatively, if you want a more hands off approach for cooking eggplants, you can roast whole eggplants in the oven, scoop out their flesh using a spoon, and use the flesh in this recipe.
  2. Peel the eggplant skins: When the eggplants reach about room temperature, run them under cool water and gently peel off as much of their black outer layer as possible. Place in a colander placed over a bowl and let them sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes. 
  3. Cut the flesh: If you choose to, remove both the eggplant flesh and any large chunks of seeds. Then, cut the flesh into small pieces and place them in a medium bowl.
Showing steps of making the yogurt eggplant dip greek style
  1. Make the yogurt mixture: In a large bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon juice, salt, and pepper until creamy.
  2. Combine the eggplant: Spoon yogurt sauce over the slices of eggplant and mix with a fork. Make sure that there are no large chunks and each piece of eggplant is evenly coated in yogurt. You may find you need more or less yogurt depending on how much eggplant you have.
  3. Serve: Transfer the mixture to a serving platter, and put pita chips or pita bread on the side. Garnish with parsley and/or sesame seeds, and it’s ready to eat!

PRO TIP: Because the amount of eggplant used varies so greatly, you may find you need more salt than listed in the recipe to give your dish enough flavor. Make sure you taste this recipe as you go and add extra seasoning as needed. 

Turkish Eggplant Dip on a plate with chopped parsley on top

Expert Tips & Variations

I always have so much fun playing with recipes to make them my own. Satisfy your taste buds with this classic Israeli yogurt dip by using these genius variations:

  • Take the stress out of fire roasting by roasting whole eggplants instead. Just poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant using a fork and place them on a rimmed baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Roast them in the oven at 400 degrees F. for 50-60 minutes, making sure to turn them halfway through. Then, remove the eggplants from the oven and set them aside to cool. You can find complete instructions for this hands-free method in my guide on how to Roast Whole Eggplant in Oven.
    Alternatively, you can cut eggplants in half lenghtwise and bake eggplant halves in the oven. Then scoop out the flesh to use in this recipe.
  • Don’t worry if you can’t get off all the burnt eggplant skin when peeling it in the sink. These charred bits will actually add more smoky flavor to the recipe.
  • Add a drizzle of sumac and pomegranate molasses for a delicious, tart twist to this eggplant dip with yogurt.
  • Pita chips, crackers, and even slices of pita bread pair perfectly with this Middle Eastern appetizer.
  • Transform this dish into aubergine yoghurt salad by adding a little bit less yogurt mixture to your roasted eggplant.
  • Give your spice rack a spin by using any fresh herbs you want in this recipe. Parsley, dill, fresh mint, or even a combination of them all make this eggplant dip Greek style.
  • Sprinkle it with this Homemade Everything Bagel Seasoning for extra crunch and flavor.
  • Prefer a version of this without the yogurt sauce? Try this Roasted Eggplant Dip

How to Make Ahead and Store

Whether you’re preparing a side dish for a dinner party or a quick snack for when you’re on the go, this aubergine yoghurt is the perfect recipe for meal prep.

  • Make ahead: When making this recipe ahead of time, prepare the fire roasted eggplant and yogurt mixture separately. This way, the eggplant won’t absorb too much liquid, and it will better retain its gentle smoky flavor.
  • Store: This eggplant dip with yogurt can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Before serving, be sure to stir the mixture to keep the yogurt, lemon, and olive oil from getting watery.
  • Freeze: Although this dip keeps well in the fridge, I don’t recommend freezing it.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Also Like:

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like:


Eggplant yogurt dip recipe in a bowl garnished with parsley
Print

Eggplant Yogurt Dip Recipe

This Eggplant yogurt recipe is made by roasting eggplants on the stove top and then mixing it with a garlic yogurt sauce. Served with pita chips on the side, it is the perfect side dish or appetizer that you can make with eggplants.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 190kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 medium size eggplants or 2 large eggplants* – no need to peel them.
  • 1 cup full fat plain Greek yogurt
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil plus more to drizzle at the end
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup Italian parsley chopped
  • Pita chips for serving
  • 1 tbsp sesame seeds or Z'aatar as garnish – optional

Instructions

  • To fire roast the eggplants on the stove: Place eggplants directly on the gas stove. Roast them on direct flames, turning it every 3-5 minutes until they are charred, soft and collapsing. Set them aside to cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, peel them gently under cold running water. At this point, all you want to do is to remove the outer black layer as much as you can. And if some pieces make it to the dip, that is perfectly fine.
  • Remove the flesh. If there are large chunks of seeds, you can remove them as well. This is an optional step and it would be okay if you didn’t remove them, especially if you are making this during the eggplant season when they are the freshest.
  • Cut the eggplant flesh into small pieces and place it in a medium sized bowl.
  • While the eggplant is cooking, whisk together the yogurt, fresh garlic, olive oil, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a bowl until creamy.
  • Pour the yogurt mixture over the cooked eggplant. Mix with a fork, gently breaking the large chunks of eggplants and making sure that they are all coated with the yogurt mixture.
  • Garnish with parsley
  • Serve with pita bread or pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • After roasting the eggplants, you should have about 3 1/2 to 4 cups of eggplant flesh for this recipe.
  • Make ahead: When making this recipe ahead of time, prepare the fire roasted eggplant and yogurt mixture separately. This way, the eggplant won’t absorb too much liquid, and it will better retain its gentle smoky flavor.
  • Store: This eggplant dip with yogurt can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Before serving, be sure to stir the mixture to keep the yogurt, lemon, and olive oil from getting watery.
  • Freeze: Although this dip keeps well in the fridge, I don’t recommend freezing it.
  • For cooking eggplants, if you prefer a more hands-off approach try roasting them as a whole: To do so, poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant using a fork and place them on a rimmed baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Roast them in the oven at 400 degrees F. for 50-60 minutes, making sure to turn them halfway through. Then, remove the eggplants from the oven and set them aside to cool. You can find complete instructions for this hands-free method in my guide on how to Roast Whole Eggplant in Oven.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 1185mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 482IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 1mg

This eggplant yogurt recipe was originally published in August 2014. It has been updated with new photos and helpful text in August 2021.

The post Eggplant Yogurt Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/feed/ 19
How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:32:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43048 I recently added a Turkish eggplant dish referred to as karniyarik to my collection of Turkish recipes. While the original recipe for karniyarik is made by frying eggplants in oil in a skillet, I like the hands-off approach of baking whole eggplants in the oven instead. Plus, it is healthier. You can also make karniyarik by cooking eggplants on the gas stove (or on the stovetop) or by using roasted...

The post How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I recently added a Turkish eggplant dish referred to as karniyarik to my collection of Turkish recipes. While the original recipe for karniyarik is made by frying eggplants in oil in a skillet, I like the hands-off approach of baking whole eggplants in the oven instead. Plus, it is healthier.

You can also make karniyarik by cooking eggplants on the gas stove (or on the stovetop) or by using roasted eggplant halves. However, in this post, I will show you how to roast a whole eggplant (or aubergine as it is called in the UK) in the oven with step-by-step photos and will answer all your questions about the basic whole roasted eggplant recipe.

Whole roasted aubergine on a baking sheet from top view

What Type of Eggplant Should I Buy For This Method?

I tested this recipe with both standard globe eggplants (the ones you see in the pictures) and graffiti eggplants, both of which are the most common variety of eggplants that you can find in American grocery stores.

When shopping for eggplants for roasting in the oven, there are a few things I recommend paying attention to:

  1. As the TV show host Amy Thielen suggests, eggplant should be heavy for its size, firm to touch, even colored with a shiny skin, and without any bruises.
  2. Take a few moments and select eggplants that are similar in size for even roasting.

With that being said, you can use this method for other kinds of eggplants like Japanese eggplants or Chinese eggplants. The time of roasting in the oven would change (possibly requiring less time) but the method would still be the same.

How To Prepare Eggplant for Baking

To prepare whole eggplants for baking:

Person washing and drying eggplants
  1. Rinse: Start by rinsing them under cold water. If there is a sticker on it, this is the time to remove that as well.
  2. Dry: Using a kitchen towel or paper towels, dry each eggplant thoroughly. You do not need to peel the skin.

How To Cook Whole Aubergines in the Oven

The steps for oven-roasted whole eggplant recipe are as follows:

  1. Heat the oven: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil and set it aside.
Person poking holes in an eggplant on a baking sheet
  1. Poke Holes: Using a fork or tip of a sharp knife, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. This is a crucial step to prevent the eggplant from exploding and creating a mess in your oven.
  2. Arrange: Place eggplants on the baking tray on a single layer and transfer them into the preheated oven.
Person placing eggplants to roast in oven
  1. Bake in the oven: Roast until they are burst, collapsed, and softened making sure to turn them every 20 minutes. This process should take about 50-60 minutes depending on the size of your eggplants.
Baked whole eggplants right out of the oven
  1. Allow them to cool: Remove from the oven and let them cool before using in your recipe.

How To Use Whole Roasted Eggplants in Recipes:

The uses for whole roasted eggplants are endless, but below are a few basic eggplant recipes to put them to use:

Eggplant recipes, karniyarik and eggplant yogurt side by side
  1. Roasted Eggplant Pulp: Slice open the belly of the roasted eggplants, scoop out eggplant flesh with a small spoon and transfer into a bowl to use in recipes like eggplant dip with yogurt, Baba ghanouj, or add it in salads (such as this Eggplant Salad), stir fries, or dips (with pita chips on the side.) You can discard the skins. 
  2. Stuff it with or whole grains: Using a knife, create a slit belly (from top to bottom) in the center of each eggplant, gently open it to stuff it with ground beef or lamb (like we do in Turkish Stuffed Eggplant.) Or fill it with simple grain dishes like Bulgur with Vermicelli or Seasoned Quinoa for a light lunch like I did in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe.
  3. Remove the skin and chop it up: I think this is one of my favorite ways to cook eggplant as a side dish. To do so, gently peel the skin of the whole baked aubergines, transfer the flesh onto a cutting board and give it a rough chop. Transfer into a large bowl, drizzle with fresh lemon juice, a drizzle of olive oil, kosher salt and pepper and sprinkle it with fresh parsley. Serve it as a simple side dish with dinner recipes.

FAQs

What temperature to roast whole eggplants?

The best temperature to roast whole eggplants is 400 degree F.,which is about 204 degrees C.

How long to roast eggplants?

The eggplant baking time depends on the size of the eggplants. However, globe eggplants usually roast between 40-60 minutes in the oven.

Do I need to salt the whole eggplants before roasting them in the oven?

You do not need to salt them before roasting them in the oven. However, I recommend seasoning roasted eggplant flesh properly before using it in your recipe.

How do you know when eggplant is done cooking?

You will know that the eggplant is done cooking when it starts to lose its perfect round shape, starts to collapse onto itself, is soft to the touch, and is charred on the outside.

Do you need to peel eggplant before roasting?

You do not need to peel eggplant before roasting it. As a matter of fact, I recommend against peeling as the skin protects the flesh from burning and/or overcooking leaving you with a perfectly roasted soft and creamy whole eggplant.

Do you eat eggplant skin and seed? 

Roasted eggplant skin is edible and if some of the remains of the charred skin gets into your recipe it only makes it better by carrying over some of the delicious smoky flavor. The seeds are also edible. However, if you want you can remove the larger seeds before using it in your recipe.

Do you recommend roasting whole eggplants in the oven for making baba ganoush?

You can use this method for making baba ghanoush. However, if you are after the delicate smoky flavor of burnt eggplant that this Middle Eastern dip is known for, I recommend cooking eggplants on the gas stove on an open flame instead.

Whole roasted Eggplant on a sheet pan right after it comes out of the oven
Print

How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven

Learn how to roast a whole eggplant in the oven to use in recipes like karniyarik (Ground Beef Stuffed Eggplants, Baba Ganoush, or Baingan Bharta.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 3 servings
Calories 1kcal

Equipment

  • Baking Sheet
  • Aluminum Foil
  • Parchment Paper

Ingredients

  • 3 Whole Globe Eggplants*

Instructions

  • Heat the oven: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil and set it aside.
  • Rinse and dry: Wash eggplants under cold running water. Dry with a paper towel or a clean kitchen towel. There is no need to peel the eggplants for this method.
  • Poke Holes: Using a fork or tip of a sharp knife, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. This is a crucial step to prevent the eggplant from exploding and creating a mess in your oven.
  • Arrange: Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and transfer them into the preheated oven.
  • Bake in the oven: Roast until they are burst, collapsed, and softened making sure to turn them every 20 minutes. This process should take about 50-60 minutes depending on the size of your eggplants.
  • Allow them to cool: Remove from the oven and let them cool before using in your recipe.

Notes

  • When buying eggplants at the store, take a moment to select ones that are similar in size for even roasting.
  • The timing might change based on the size of the eggplant. I would recommend checking it every 20 minutes and turning them to make sure they are roasting evenly.
  • You can use this exact method for other types of eggplants. However, smaller eggplants would roast faster so it is recommended that you keep an eye on them as they roast.
  • Storage: You can roast a whole eggplant, bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for upto 2 days.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whole eggplants after they are roasted. If you want to freeze, I recommend first peeling them before placing them in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Calories: 1kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 2mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/feed/ 7
Fire Roasted Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:29:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43128 It is no secret that roasting a whole eggplant in the oven is the most hands-off method of cooking it. However, in my opinion, the method that delivers the most flavor is by cooking it on the stovetop on a direct flame. If you are not familiar with this method, you might think of it being similar to grilling it but it is not. Instead, we cook eggplants over a...

The post Fire Roasted Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that roasting a whole eggplant in the oven is the most hands-off method of cooking it. However, in my opinion, the method that delivers the most flavor is by cooking it on the stovetop on a direct flame.

If you are not familiar with this method, you might think of it being similar to grilling it but it is not. Instead, we cook eggplants over a direct flame on the gas burner by turning every few minutes to ensure even roasting. Some people also refer to this method as chargrilling as the eggplants get charred during the cooking process.

Fire roasted eggplants on a plate served by a person

Why Cook Eggplant on A Gas Stove – Pros & Cons

Before I show you how to use this method, I want to lay out the pros and cons of it so that you can decide for yourself. 

Pros:

  1. Delicate smoky flavor: Having been cooking eggplant since I was 10 years old, I do not know any other method that delivers the authentic smoky flavors that eggplant is known for. 
  2. Fast: Depending on the size of your eggplants, you can roast a whole eggplant in about 15-20 minutes. In my experience, this is faster than roasting it in the oven or grilling it.
  3. Easy to batch cook & freeze: You can have several burners on and roast several eggplants at the same time. This way, you can roast a large batch, use some in recipes and freeze the rest for later. This is especially a good method if you are growing eggplants in your garden.
  4. No need to salt eggplant: You do not need to take the step of salting the eggplant before cooking it.

Cons:

  1. Gas stove: You need a gas stove with an open flame. I tried a few other ways, like grilling on a gas grill, but I couldn’t get the char that the direct flame delivers.
  2. It is not hands off: While it is quicker, you have to keep a close eye on it and turn it in every few minutes to ensure even roasting.
  3. It is messy: Below I will show you a quick tip to minimize the cleaning, but still there is a little bit of cleaning afterwards.

How To Fire Roast Eggplant on A Gas Stove Top:

For this method, I used the most popular (and widely available) globe eggplants. However, you can use other eggplant varieties like Italian eggplant and graffiti eggplant as well.

Person preparing eggplant for fire roasting
  1. Rinse & Dry: Rinse eggplants under cold running water. If there is a sticker on them, remove it. Dry with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Set them aside.
Person laying the bottom of a stove with aluminum foil
  1. Prepare your gas range: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil making sure to keep the burners exposed. I usually cut out the part where the burners are located (as seen in the photo above) to make it easier for cleaning purposes later on.
Person cooking eggplants on a gas stove on direct fire
  1. Turn the burners on: Turn the burners on medium heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. I usually put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones.
Roasted eggplants on stovetop
  1. Roast: Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs being very careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
Person peeling fire roasted eggplants under cold water
  1. Let them cool: Transfer the now-fire roasted eggplant onto a plate and let them cool. This may take between 10-15 minutes.
  2. Peel & Drain: Place a colander over a large bowl. When eggplants are cool enough to handle, peel them under cold running water by gently removing the black skin making sure to keep the flesh intact. If some burnt bits of skin are left behind that is okay. Discard the rest of the skin. Transfer the eggplant flesh (aka pulp) to the colander and let it drain for 10-15 minutes.
    Alternatively, you can skip the whole peeling under the running water part and use a small spoon to separate the white flesh from the charred skin.
roasted eggplant pulp seeds being taken off by a person
  1. Use it in your recipe or freeze for later use: When ready to use, give it a rough chop or mash them on a cutting board (or food processor) according to the recipe you are following. Or, freeze for later use (more on how-to freeze that below.) It is optional, but if there are large seeds, you can remove them with a knife.

How To Store & Freeze:

  • Storage: Place fire roasted eggplant in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Once the roasted eggplants are fully drained, place the eggplant pulp in a freezer bag like Stasher (affiliate link) or Zip Lock and get the air out of it as much as you can. 

Helpful Tips:

  • Do not skip the draining process: This is especially important if you are going to make baba ganoush. If you skip this step, it will make your recipe soggy. 
  • Keep a close eye on the eggplants as they are cooking: For safety purposes, be sure to not leave the side of your eggplants as they are roasting on the gas stove.
  • Be sure to season well: If you give your fire-roasted eggplants a taste, they might taste a bit bland. But you should think of it as a blank canvas begging to be flavored. You can make a quick tahini sauce by mixing tahini paste with fresh lemon juice, a few minced garlic cloves, olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper and drizzle it over eggplants. Or, give them a rough chop and mix with fresh produce like tomatoes, green or red onions, fresh parsley to make a chopped eggplant salad.

FAQs:

Do I need to remove the seeds?

The seeds are edible but you can remove the large visible seeds if you want. If your eggplants are older, sometimes seeds might have an unpleasant bitter taste so be sure to give it a quick taste to decide whether or not to remove them.

Do I need to salt eggplant before cooking on the gas stove?

No, you can salt it after it is chargrilled and peeled.

Is eggplant healthy?

Yes, it is. According to Healthline, ” Eggplant is a high-fiber, low-calorie food that is rich in nutrients and comes with many potential health benefits.”

Other Basic Cooking Methods For Eggplants:

Aubergine Recipes You Might Like:

fire roasted eggplants on a plate
Print

Fire Roasted Eggplant Recipe – Cooking eggplants on stovetop

Learn how to make fire roasted eggplant by cooking eggplants on the stove top over direct flame to use in recipes like Stuffed Eggplants, Baba Ganoush, and Baingan Bharta.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 eggplants
Calories 115kcal

Equipment

  • Gas stove
  • Tong
  • Colander

Ingredients

  • 2 globe eggplants

Instructions

  • Rinse & Dry: Rinse eggplants under cold running water. If there is a sticker on them, remove it. Dry with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Set them aside. There is no need to peel the eggplant for fire roasting it.
  • Prepare your gas range: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil making sure to keep the burners exposed. I usually cut out the part where the burners are located to make it easier for cleaning purposes after the roasting process is completed.
  • Turn the burners on: Turn the burners on medium-heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. I usually put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones.
  • Roast: Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs being very careful to not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
  • Let them cool: Transfer the now-fire roasted eggplant onto a plate and let them cool. This may take between 10-15 minutes.
  • Peel & Drain: Place a colander over a large bowl. When eggplants are cool enough to handle, peel them under cold running water by gently removing the black skin making sure to keep the flesh intact. If some burnt bits of skin are left behind that is okay. Discard the rest of the skin. Transfer the eggplant flesh to the colander and let it drain for 10-15 minutes*. Alternatively, you can skip the whole peeling under running water part and use a small spoon to separate the white flesh from the charred skin.
  • Use it in your recipe or freeze for later use: When ready to use, give it a rough chop or mash them on a cutting board (or food processor) according to the recipe you are following. Or, freeze for later use.

Notes

  • I listed only 2 eggplants in the ingredients list but you can cook as many eggplants as you like.
  • I used globe eggplants but you can use other eggplants like graffiti eggplant, Italian eggplant, etc. The timing might be different but it would still work.
  • Storage: Place fire-roasted eggplant in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Once the roasted eggplants are fully drained, place the eggplant pulp in a freezer bag like Stasher or Zip-Lock and get the air out of it as much as you can. 
  • Do not skip the draining process: This is especially important if you are going to make baba ganoush. If you skip this step, your recipe will turn out soggy. 
  • Keep a close eye on the eggplants as they are cooking: For safety purposes, be sure to not leave the side of your eggplants as they are roasting on the gas stove.

Nutrition

Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Fire Roasted Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/feed/ 2
Piyaz – Turkish White Bean Salad https://foolproofliving.com/piyaz/ https://foolproofliving.com/piyaz/#comments Thu, 01 Jul 2021 18:40:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=41923 You can’t talk about Turkish Cuisine and not mention Piyaz, our version of White Bean Salad recipe. Growing up, this was a staple in our house. My mom would serve this as a side dish with her kofte (aka Turkish meatballs) or karniyarik (aka stuffed eggplants). Whenever we had this on the menu, she would call it the “Kofte Piyaz” dinner. It was her version of a weeknight meal because...

The post Piyaz – Turkish White Bean Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
You can’t talk about Turkish Cuisine and not mention Piyaz, our version of White Bean Salad recipe. Growing up, this was a staple in our house. My mom would serve this as a side dish with her kofte (aka Turkish meatballs) or karniyarik (aka stuffed eggplants).

Whenever we had this on the menu, she would call it the “Kofte Piyaz” dinner. It was her version of a weeknight meal because it comes together so quickly with minimal effort. If you are a fan of one of the most popular Turkish recipe kisir, aka tabbouleh, you will love this recipe.

A bowl of Piyaz Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Why I love this recipe:

If you have ever traveled around the Middle Eastern and Mediterranean regions or visited one of the Turkish restaurants around the world, chances are you are familiar with this cold white bean salad recipe. Several cuisines like Greek, Turkish, Persian, and even Armenian offer a version of this salad. 

Here are a few reasons why I think this recipe is so popular and stood the test of time:

  1. Made with simple everyday ingredients in 10 minutes: You probably already have everything in your pantry.
  2. Easy to customize: Any type of white beans (Navy Bean, Cannellini, Butter Beans, etc.) would work here. Plus, there are a number of popular variations which I cover below.
  3. Special diet friendly: The traditional version is vegan and gluten free. Though some people also serve it with a few boiled eggs on top. Either way, it is a vegetarian, gluten free and low-carb recipe making it ideal for most special diets.

Ingredients:

As it is with most salad recipes, this Turkish white bean recipe has three sets of ingredients; a zesty salad dressing, fresh salad ingredients, and optional toppings.

Ingredients for Turkish salad dressing on a marble backdrop
  1. The dressing: This happens to be my favorite Turkish salad dressing and it takes just a few minutes to make. You will need olive oil, apple cider vinegar, fresh garlic, lemon juice, salt and pepper and optional red chili pepper flakes, such as Aleppo pepper.
ingredients for the recipe are individually placed in bowls from the top view
  1. Key Ingredients for the salad: For the rest, you will need home cooked or canned white navy beans, tomatoes, red onion, and Italian parsley.
  2. Optional Toppings: If you want to take it up a notch, you can garnish your Turkish beans salad with sumac, black olives, and even a few boiled eggs on top.

Substitutions:

  • White beans: You can cook your own white beans from dry beans or use canned beans. I personally like to make this salad with Navy beans, but Cannellini beans or even butter beans would also work. Here is a handy guide to show you how to cook beans for salad.
  • Vinegar: The traditional piyaz salad recipe is made with grape vinegar, which is slightly sweeter than your usual white wine vinegar. To me, apple cider vinegar offers the closest fruity tones, but you can also use white or red wine vinegar.
  • Tomatoes: I used two-medium-sized heirloom tomatoes but you can use cherry or roma tomatoes as well.
  • Sumac: If you are not familiar, sumac is a tangy spice with a sour acidic flavor similar to lemon juice. It is made from the dried and ground berries of the wild sumac flower. You can find it in any Middle Eastern market, but you can also buy it on Amazon. This sumac brand (affiliate link) is my favorite one.

How To Make This Turkish Salad?:

person whisking the dressing and red onions soaking in water
  1. Make the salad dressing: Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
  2. Prep the salad ingredients: Drain canned beans and rinse them under cold water. Slice the tomatoes in ½ inch and red onions in ¼ inch half moon shape. Place red onions in a bowl with water and let them soak for a few minutes. Doing so helps with removing the harsh flavors of raw onion and makes it easier to digest.
Person showing the steps for how to make the recipe for white bean salad with 4 photos
  1. Assemble: Add the beans, sliced tomatoes and red onion in a large salad bowl. Stir in the roughly chopped Italian parsley and drizzle it with the dressing.
  2. Cover & let it rest: While it is optional, I recommend letting it rest in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving. Doing so allows the white beans to soak in all the flavors and make it extra delicious.
  3. Serve: Sprinkle with sumac and if using, garnish with boiled eggs and olives.

Serving Suggestions:

Make Ahead and Storage Instructions:

  • Make Ahead: Most people include this navy bean salad recipe as a part of their meal prep because it gets better as it sits. You can make the whole recipe a day in advance and serve it on the next day.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container up to 3 days in the fridge. You might have to taste the seasoning and add it if necessary.
Turkish side salad placed in an oval dish and garnished with eggs and parsley.

A Few Variations:

  • Antalya Piyazi made with tahini: If you are not familiar, Antalya province is located in the South of Turkey and this Turkish bean salad is one of their local dishes. However, their version is slightly different because they add a quarter cup of tahini into the dressing. Some recipes suggest that they use sesame oil instead of  olive oil but I usually make it with olive oil. The rest of the recipe is the same. It is a truly delicious version of serving it, especially if you want to try something different.
  • Play with the amount of tomatoes you use: During the summer months, when summer tomatoes are in abundance I usually use more than what I would use during the winter months. With that being said, an easy piyaz salad recipe can also be made without tomatoes. Simply omit them if you wish to do so.

FAQs:

What is piyaz?

Piyaz is a Turkish salad recipe that is made with cooked white beans, red onions, and a zesty grape vinegar and lemon juice salad dressing. It is also a popular dish served as a side dish, meze (small tapas like dishes), or a main meal in most Middle East and Mediterranean countries.

What is the meaning of word, “piyaz”?

The word piyaz, pronounced as peeh-has, in Turkish means bean salad. However, piyaz means onion in Farsi.

What does piyaz taste like?

Piyaz offers refreshingly zesty and creamy flavors with every bite. The soft white beans mixed with red onions and zesty vinaigrette delivers a bit of savory, sweet, creamy, and tangy all at the same time.

Other Bean Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you liked this piyaz recipe, it is likely that you are a fan of bean salads like we do. Here are a few more recipes you might also like:

Piyaz - Turkish White Bean Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side
Print

Piyaz – Turkish White Bean Salad Recipe

Piyaz, a refreshing, creamy and zesty Turkish white bean salad that is the perfect side dish when you want to impress. It comes together in 10 minutes and can be made in advance.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 136kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 4 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Piyaz Salad:

  • 1/2 small red onion sliced thinly in half moon shape (1/2 cup)
  • 2 cans white bean Cannelini or Navy Beans would work – drained and rinsed
  • 2 medium sized tomatoes sliced ½ inch in half moon shape
  • ½ cup Italian Parsley roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac

Optional:

  • 3 tablespoons Black pitted olives
  • 2 hard boiled eggs sliced

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Place olive oil, apple cider vinegar, garlic clove, lemon juice, kosher salt, and black pepper in a bowl and whisk until fully incorporated. Set aside.
  • Place sliced red onion in a bowl of water and let soak for 5 minutes, drain.*
  • Assemble the salad: Place white beans, drained red onions, sliced tomatoes, and chopped parsley in a large bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and sumac. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Cover it with plastic wrap and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving. This is an optional step but allows flavors to mingle and deliver a next level delicious salad.
  • If preferred, garnish with black pitted olives and hard boiled eggs. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Soaking red onions is an optional step. If you don’t have time, simply use sliced onions. I find that soaking them for a few minutes helps with digestion and tames their strong flavor.
  • Antalya Piyaz made with tahini: If you have ever been to the Antalya province of Turkey, you may have had their version of this piyaz recipe made with tahini. If you want to give that version a try, add in a quarter cup of tahini (sesame paste) into the dressing and follow the rest of the recipe exactly written.
  • Make Ahead: Most people include this navy bean salad recipe as a part of their meal prep because it gets better as it sits. You can make the whole recipe a day in advance and serve it on the next day.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container upto 3 days in the fridge. You might have to taste the seasoning and add it if necessary.
  • The calorie values listed here do not include the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 136kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 109mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 705IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Piyaz – Turkish White Bean Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/piyaz/feed/ 12
Baked Zucchini Fritters with Breadcrumbs and Feta https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/ https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/#comments Fri, 25 Jun 2021 19:15:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9889 It is a shame that for as long as I have been blogging I haven’t shared a baked zucchini fritter recipe. Because growing up, baked courgette fritters (as my mom called them) were one of those dishes that my mother made very often during the summer months. After receiving requests from many people asking for her zucchini feta fritters recipe, I knew that it needed to be added to my...

The post Baked Zucchini Fritters with Breadcrumbs and Feta appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is a shame that for as long as I have been blogging I haven’t shared a baked zucchini fritter recipe. Because growing up, baked courgette fritters (as my mom called them) were one of those dishes that my mother made very often during the summer months.

After receiving requests from many people asking for her zucchini feta fritters recipe, I knew that it needed to be added to my collection of Turkish recipes. So today, this healthy zucchini appetizer recipe comes to you directly out of my mom’s handwritten cookbook.

Baked Courgette Fritters on a plate served with yogurt sauce

Before I continue to explain the recipe, I want to clarify the terminology around it. Because if you do a quick search you will realize that people refer to this recipe in several different ways. Some examples are baked zucchini patties, baked zucchini latkes, baked zucchini cakes, baked zucchini puffs, zucchini bites, or baked zucchini pancakes. Essentially, they are all the same thing.

Got some extra zucchini to use? Check out our reader favorites Zucchini Noodles and Low-Calorie Zucchini Soup recipes.

Why I Love This Recipe:

Whether you refer to them as fritters, cakes, puffs, pancakes, or patties, they are good. Here are a few reasons why this recipe is better than any other:

  1. It is healthier compared to the classic fried zucchini fritters: If you were asking yourself, can I bake zucchini fritters? this recipe is your answer. There is no frying happening here. Instead, we mix everything in a bowl, portion them out on a sheet pan, and bake in the oven. And surprisingly, this healthy version is just as good in terms of taste.
  2. A great way to use leftover shredded zucchini: If you have some leftover shredded zucchini from making zucchini bread (like my Almond Flour Zucchini Bread or Vegan Zucchini Bread recipes), you can use the leftover zucchini to make these zucchini patties.
  3. The Perfect Side Dish: When summer rolls around and fresh zucchini is in abundance, these summery baked vegetable fritters make the best vegetable side dish to serve with breakfast eggs or chicken, meat, and vegetarian dinner recipes.
  4. Easy To Customize: My mom flavored her baked courgette fritters with dill and feta cheese but you can use other types of cheeses and herbs, ie. parmesan cheese and parsley.
  5. No Flour: This recipe uses breadcrumbs instead of flour, which gives it a nice body and texture. Also, if you are following a keto diet, you can use almond flour instead of breadcrumbs.

Ingredients:

As I mentioned earlier, this baked zucchini pancakes recipe has a lot of Turkish/Greek influences. The combination of zucchini-dill-feta is truly delicious and a very easy way to flavor what could otherwise be quite boring a baked zucchini appetizer. The rest is a bunch of simple ingredients you probably have in your fridge/pantry.

Ingredients for the recipes are placed in individual cups on a marble backdrop

In terms of ingredients, you will need medium-size zucchini, fresh garlic, baking powder, large eggs, feta cheese, panko bread crumbs (or regular bread crumbs), scallions, and fresh dill.

Substitutions & Helpful Notes on Ingredients:

  • Zucchini: You will need 2 1/2 cups (packed tightly) of shredded zucchini. I used 2 medium-sized zucchinis (about 1 1/2 lbs in total) but if yours are smaller or larger adjust the number of zucchinis you use accordingly. You do not have to peel them, especially if it is during the summer months when they are in season.
  • Breadcrumbs: I use panko breadcrumbs (aka Japanese breadcrumbs) that have a crunchier and lighter texture. However, you can use regular (or gluten-free) breadcrumbs as well. The texture will be a little bit heartier but still good.
  • Baking Powder: I know that baking powder is an unusual ingredient here, but using a little bit of baking powder helps them keep their shape and also rise a bit.
  • Feta Cheese: As it is with any recipe with feta cheese, make sure to taste the cheese before adding salt to the recipe. In this dish, I used only a ½ teaspoon of kosher salt to help extract the juices from the zucchini. My feta cheese was quite salty so I didn’t add any more salt. But if yours is less salty, adjust the amount of salt accordingly.
  • Topping for Baked Fritters: I used my yogurt sauce, but you can also serve it with my easy tzatziki recipe.

How to Make Oven Baked Zucchini Fritters:

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
Person showing how to remove the excess liquid from the shredded zucchini
  1. Prepare the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place the shredded zucchini in the middle of a clean tea towel, collect it from the sides and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of zucchini. Set it in a large bowl.
Four images showing how to make courgette patties
  1. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in garlic, olive oil, baking powder, black pepper, eggs, feta cheese, Panko bread crumbs, scallions (green onions), and fresh dill in the bowl with zucchini.
  2. Scoop onto a baking sheet: Using a spoon or medium-sized ice cream scoop, scoop out about 2 tablespoons of the batter and drop onto the prepared baking sheet. Continue until you run out of the batter. Gently press each fritter with your fingers (or back of a spoon) to make flatten.
  3. Bake in the oven: Bake in the preheated oven for 22-25 minutes or until they turned golden brown on the outside. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.
  4. Make the yogurt sauce: If using, make the Greek yogurt sauce by mixing all ingredients in a bowl.
  5. Serve: Place a few of the freshly baked zucchini bites on a plate and top them off with the sauce. Serve.

Variations:

  • Gluten-free: If you want to make them gluten-free, be sure to use gluten-free breadcrumbs.
  • Use different kinds of cheese: You can change it up by using shredded cheddar or parmesan instead of feta cheese. I promise parmesan zucchini bites are just as good as its version with feta cheese.
  • Low Carb Keto Zucchini Fritters: If you want to make this recipe low-carb/keto-friendly, use 1/2 cup almond flour or almond meal instead of 1 cup of breadcrumbs.
  • Use different fresh herbs: The classic Greek zucchini fritters recipe uses dill, but you can swap dill with fresh parsley as well. And if you are not a fan or have no herbs on hand, feel free to omit using them.

Make Ahead, Storage & Freezing Instructions:

  • Make ahead: You can prepare all the ingredients in advance to save on time. However, I recommend mixing the batter right before baking so you won’t end up with soggy fritters.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can serve them cold or warm them up in a low-heat 280-300 degrees F oven for 5-7 minutes.
  • Freezing Thawing: While I personally liked the freshly baked version the most, you can freeze these fritters. Before freezing, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then place in an airtight container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight and warm up in a low heat oven until warmed thoroughly, 5-10 minutes.
A plate with Baked courgette Fritters with Feta and Dill are served with yogurt sauce and photographed from the front.

Expert Tips:

  • Do not skip the process of squeezing the juices out of the zucchini: I know it is extra work, but it is an important step to help fritters to hold their shape and not be soggy.
  • Use an ice cream scoop for even fritters: An ice cream scoop is a really helpful tool to use here as it will help to get equal-sized zucchini balls, which in turn will help them bake at the same time and evenly. So if you have one, I would highly recommend using it.
  • Use a box grater instead of a food processor: While a food processor might be easier and quicker to shred the zucchini, I find that grating it in a box grater does a better job. Mainly because the food processor makes the shredded zucchini pieces too thin.

FAQs:

Can you bake zucchini fritters?

Yes, you can. If you are used to eating the fried version of zucchini bites you might be surprised to hear that you can totally cook them in the oven with a few minor changes. And the baked version of this recipe is not only healthier but also doesn’t taste much different than its fried version.

Do I need to peel the zucchini to make fritters?

If I am making it in the summer time during the zucchini season I do not peel the skin. I make sure to give it a through wash though. However, this is a personal preference. You can make this recipe both ways, with or without the skin on.

Can I make Baked Zucchini Fritters batter in advance?

I would not recommend making this batter in advance. The reason is because of the high water content of zucchini. As the batter sits in the fridge, the shredded zucchini releases more of its juices and the excess water turns to batter into a very soggy mixture. I have tried this twice and in both cases thought that the end product was not ideal.

Can I freeze these Baked Zucchini Pancakes?

Yes, you can. However, I recommend baking them first. You also want to make sure that they are at room temperature before freezing. When ready to serve, simply place them in a 350-degree oven for 8-10 minutes. No need to thaw beforehand. I also recommend keeping a close eye on them as they bake because they warm-up (and burn) pretty quickly.

Can I pan-fry these zucchini fritters instead of baking them in the oven?

Yes, you can. Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large 12-inch non-stick skillet. Scoop 3-4 fritters at a time making sure not to overcrowd the pan. They should be on a single layer without touching each other. Cook 3-5 minutes on one side and flip to cook the other side. Store the cooked zucchini pancakes in a low heat (200 F oven) while working on cooking the rest with adding more oil to the skillet after each batch.

Other Recipe Ideas for Shredded Zucchini:

Think about what else you can make with grated zucchini? I’ve got you covered. Here are a few more ideas to put that leftover shredded zucchini to good use:

Other Zucchini Recipes You Might Like


Baked Zucchini Fritters placed on a plate served with yogurt sauce on the side
Print

Baked Zucchini Fritters Recipe

These Baked Zucchini Fritters are flavored with feta cheese, fresh dill, and scallions. In my version, instead of using flour I used Panko breadcrumbs and ground oats as well as eggs to bind all the ingredients. You can serve them with fried eggs or as a side dish with any of your meat and vegetable dishes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 10 fritters
Calories 107kcal

Ingredients

For the Zucchini Fritters

  • 2 medium-sized zucchini (1 1/2 pounds) – 2 1/2 cups after shredded, peeled and grated
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 large eggs
  • ¾ cup crumbled feta cheese
  • 1 cup Panko Bread Crumbs
  • 2 scallions chopped thinly
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill chopped – plus more as garnish

For the Yogurt Sauce: (optional)

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Prepare the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place the shredded zucchini in the middle of a clean kitchen towel, collect it from the sides and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of zucchini. Set it in a bowl.
  • Mix together the grated zucchini, garlic, olive oil, baking powder, black pepper, eggs, feta cheese, Panko bread crumbs, scallions, and dill in a bowl.
  • Using a spoon or medium-sized ice cream scoop, scoop out about 2 tablespoons of the batter and drop onto the baking sheet. Continue until you run out of the batter. Gently press each fritter with your fingers to make flatten.
  • Bake for 22-25 minutes or until golden. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.
  • To make the yogurt sauce: Whisk together all the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Serve zucchini fritters with the yogurt sauce and more dill on the side.

Video

Notes

  • If you watch the how-to video above, you will see that I placed the shredded zucchini in a colander and sprinkled it with salt to get its juices out. You can use both the cloth method or the colander method. The reason why I changed it is that I want to make sure I am not adding too much salt into the recipe, especially because I am using feta cheese. 
    While you can use both methods to get the juices out, I highly recommend giving a taste to your feta cheese and adjusting the amount of salt you put in the recipe accordingly.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all the ingredients in advance to save on time. However, I recommend mixing the batter right before baking so you won’t end up with soggy fritters.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can serve them cold or warm them up in a low-heat 280-300 degrees F oven for 5-7 minutes.
  • Freezing Thawing: While I personally liked the freshly baked version the most, you can freeze these fritters. Before freezing, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then place in an airtight container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight and warm up in a low heat oven until warmed thoroughly, 5-10 minutes.
  • Can I pan-fry these zucchini fritters instead of baking them in the oven?Yes, you can. Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large 12-inch non-stick skillet. Scoop 3-4 fritters at a time making sure not to overcrowd the pan. Cook 3-5 minutes on one side and flip to cook the other side. Store the cooked zucchini pancakes in low heat (200 F oven) while working on cooking the rest by adding more oil to the skillet after each batch.
  • An earlier version of this recipe listed 2 tablespoons of ground oats in the list of ingredients. After testing the recipe a few more times, I decided that this recipe can also be made without oats. You can still add them but it is an optional ingredient.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 469mg | Potassium: 178mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 203IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg

This Easy Baked Zucchini Fritters Recipe was originally published in 2016. It is updated with additional helpful information in June 2021. A few minor changes to the originally published recipe were made.

The post Baked Zucchini Fritters with Breadcrumbs and Feta appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oven-baked-zucchini-fritters-feta-dill/feed/ 18
Turkish Simit Recipe with Step-by-Step Instructions https://foolproofliving.com/simit/ https://foolproofliving.com/simit/#comments Sat, 20 Mar 2021 06:42:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2967 If you have ever visited Turkey or are a fan of Turkish food, you know our version of a bagel, Turkish Simit bread. It is one of those iconic Turkish recipes, right up there with Turkish Coffee, Borek, and Turkish Bulgur Pilaf. Usually served with feta cheese, olives, and Turkish tea, simit is considered a breakfast staple in every Turkish household for centuries. Sadly, for those of us living outside...

The post Turkish Simit Recipe with Step-by-Step Instructions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever visited Turkey or are a fan of Turkish food, you know our version of a bagel, Turkish Simit bread. It is one of those iconic Turkish recipes, right up there with Turkish Coffee, Borek, and Turkish Bulgur Pilaf.

Usually served with feta cheese, olives, and Turkish tea, simit is considered a breakfast staple in every Turkish household for centuries. Sadly, for those of us living outside of Turkey, it is not easy to find (unless you are living in a town with a great Turkish restaurant.) The good news is that making simit at home is easy with my foolproof method.

Turkish Simit in a large bowl from the front

What Is Simit?

Simit also referred to as gevrek or gjevrek, is a sesame-bathed, circular Turkish bread. It is similar to American bagel in how it looks, but crustier on the outside and softer on the inside.

Because it is mainly served for breakfast, I’ve heard some people in the US refer to it as “Turkish Bagel.”

Traditionally sold by street vendors on the streets of Turkey for no more than $0.50, it is usually made by twisting simit dough and dipping it in molasses and toasted sesame seeds before baking it in the oven.

Ingredients Needed:

To make it easier, I will divide the simit ingredients into three parts.

Ingredients needed to activate the yeast
  1. The Yeast & Milk Mixture: You will need water at 110 F degrees (43 Celsius), 1 cup whole milk (or heavy cream) at room temperature, and 2 tablespoons or 3 (1/4 oz.) packets of active dry yeast (I used Fleischmann’s) and granulated sugar.

A quick note on using whole milk versus heavy cream: You can use milk and heavy cream interchangeably in this recipe. The version of simit bagel made with heavy cream is richer due to the higher fat content of heavy cream. Still, if you can’t find it, you can substitute it with whole milk. I would not recommend substituting plant-based milk in this recipe.

Ingredients for simit dough recipe
  1. The rest of the ingredients: Gather all-purpose flour, a large egg, kosher salt, and vegetable oil (avocado oil, canola oil, or grapeseed oil would all work).

A quick note on the flour I used: I tested this recipe with several all-purpose flour brands, and the results were similar. I personally like King Arthur Flour as it has a higher amount of protein which is ideal for making bread. The recipe below starts with 5 cups, but you will need at least 1 to 1 ½ cups or more flour to use on the surface as you are kneading the simit dough.

Ingredients to dip the raw dough
  1. The dipping ingredients: Molasses (I used Grandma’s Molasses (affiliate link) and white sesame seeds. Alternatively, you can also use grape or pomegranate molasses if you can get your hands on them, which is traditionally used in Turkey.

How To Make Simit?

This Simit bread recipe below makes 10 simits. Even though the steps look like a lot, the process of making simit is quite simple.

person filling a measuring cup with the ingredients to activate the yeast
  1. Activate the yeast: Place water, milk, sugar, and active dry yeast into a measuring cup. Give it a quick whisk, cover it with stretch film, and let it sit on the counter for 10 to 15 minutes or until bubbles form on top.
Person showing how to make the simit dough recipe
  1. Make the simit dough: Place 5 cups (700 grams) of all-purpose flour, kosher salt, oil, egg, and now-risen yeast-milk mixture in a large mixing bowl. Start mixing by hand until it comes together. Lightly dust the counter with flour and dump the dough onto the surface. Knead by hand to form a smooth and elastic dough until the dough is not sticking to your fingers. This may take around 15 -17 minutes.
Showing the simit dough before and after it is risen
  1. Let the simit dough rise: Lightly wet a kitchen towel with hot tap water and place it over the dough. Let it sit on the kitchen counter until it doubles in size, 30-45 minutes.
person toasting sesame seeds in a skillet top view
  1. Toast sesame seeds: While the dough is rising, place sesame seeds in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat, stirring constantly, and toast until they turn golden brown, 20-25 minutes. Transfer into a large shallow plate to cool. 
Person showing how to roll the dough into a cylinder
  1. Turn the dough into a cylinder: Fold the dough from each end onto itself towards the middle, gently pinch, and roll into a cylinder of roughly 20-inches (51 cm.)
Person dividing the  Turkish bagel dough into small pieces and placing on a sheet
  1. Divide the now-risen dough: Using a sharp knife or a pastry scraper, divide the dough into 10 equal pieces and transfer onto a sheet pan (lined with parchment paper and sprinkled with flour.) Cover it with a clean kitchen towel (to prevent them from drying as you work on each piece.) 
  2. Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
Person showing how to shape and twist Turkish bread recipe
  1. Shape each simit dough: Roll each dough ball into a roughly 40-inch (102 cm) long strand. Fold the string onto itself using your finger to hold it in the middle. Twist the dough in the opposite direction to form a spiral rope. Roll it into a 5-inch diameter ring and gently pinch the end to seal. 
Shaped dough on a sheet pan
  1. Let the simits rest: Transfer the now-shaped dough onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Repeat the same process for the rest of the dough balls. Let them rest until they rise for 30 minutes. How much they rise depends on the temperature of your kitchen. (You can learn more about this in the tips section below)
Person dipping Turkish Simit bagel into molasses and sesame seeds
  1. Dip simit into molasses and sesame seeds: Mix together molasses with water in a large shallow plate. Bring in the sesame seeds. First, dip simit into the molasses mixture (on both sides) and then into the sesame seeds making sure that all sides are fully covered with sesame seeds. Transfer onto a baking sheet and repeat the same process for the rest of the limit.
Baked Turkish simit on a sheet pan
  1. Bake: Bake both sheets in the oven for 18-20 minutes or until golden brown making sure to rotate them from top to bottom halfway through the baking process. Let them cool for 5 minutes and serve while still warm.

What To Serve it with?

Traditionally, we serve simit bread for breakfast with feta cheese, olives, sliced tomatoes and cucumbers, and Turkish tea. With that being said, you can serve it with any cheese and even with your favorite jams or preserves.

Showing ways to serve Turkish simit

Alternatively, you can make a simit sandwich by slicing it horizontally in half and place cheese, sliced tomatoes, and cucumbers in the middle.

Simit sandwich on a plate layered with feta cheese and tomatoes

How To Store and Freeze?

The best part of this recipe is to make a batch, eat some right away, and freeze the rest for later.

  • To store leftovers: Bring simit to room temperature, place in a plastic bag, remove the air out as much as you can, and store at room temperature. It should be fresh for up to 2 days. You can toast it for a few minutes before serving.
  • To freeze: Repeat the same process but place in the freezer instead. When ready to serve, let it thaw for 10 minutes on the counter, and then heat it in a preheated 300 F degree oven for 10-12 minutes.

Tips For Success & Troubleshooting:

  • The shape doesn’t matter:  If this is your first time trying your hand in making this Turkish simit recipe and if your simit strands don’t look like the ones in the pictures, do not worry. I promise that they will look better as they rise, and regardless of their appearance, they will taste great after they are baked. You will get the hang of it after you make it a few times.
  • The temperature of the water & milk: For the active dry yeast to get activated, your water must be around 110 F degrees (43 Celsius), and your milk (or heavy cream) is at room temperature. If they are colder or warmer, the yeast might not get activated, and as a result, your simit Turkish bread might fall flat.
  • The temperature of your kitchen: As it is with any bread recipe (like I explained in my Challah bread recipe), the temperature of your kitchen (or the time of the year) will affect how much your dough rises. If you are making simit on a hot summer day, it will likely double in size. However, I have made this recipe several times all throughout the year, and it consistently delivered great results.
  • The temperature of your oven: Most Turkish simit recipes start with a 400 F degree oven, bake for 20-25 minutes, raise the temperature to 425 to 450 F degrees and then bake a little longer (usually 5-7 minutes). I tested this recipe several times and did not think it was necessary to bake it in two stages. However, I recommend keeping an eye on it after the 18th-minute mark.
  • Sesame seeds cook faster than the simit dough: Be careful when you open the oven door at the end of the baking process as some smoke might come out due to sesame seeds cooking faster than the limit. 
  • Istanbul Simit vs. Street Simit: If you ever visit Turkey, you will see that the simit sold on the street does not have this much sesame seeds because sesame seeds are costly. My mom, who grew up in Istanbul, always made simit with a lot of sesame seeds, similar to how I did here. If you are not a fan, you can adjust the amount and use less.

Frequently Asked Questions:

How is Turkish simit different from American Bagel?

Compared to American bagels, the Turkish simit is lighter and crustier. Also, there is no boiling done during the process of making simit. Instead, we dip simit dough in a water-molasses mixture and coat it in sesame seeds before baking.

What does simit taste like?

It tastes like a lightly sweetened, savory crusty bread with a very pronounced sesame flavor.

Can I make this recipe without molasses?

While it is not traditional, you can use honey instead of molasses. However, please be aware that the taste might be slightly different. To do so, use a mixture of 5-6 tablespoons of honey and 4 tablespoons of water instead.

Can I use a stand mixer (like KitchenAid) instead of kneading the simit dough by hand?

Yes, you can, and I recommend using the dough hook to knead. Also, you might have to adjust the amount of flour by adding more until the dough no longer sticks to the bowl.

How many calories per serving?

Each serving of this recipe is 370 calories.

Other bread recipes you might also like

Other Turkish recipes you might like

Turkish simit bread placed in a bowl from the top
Print

Turkish Simit Recipe (Turkish Bagel)

Learn how to make Turkish bread recipe using my foolproof method. Traditionally served for breakfast, our version of bagel is easy to make with my step by step instructions.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 10 simits
Calories 370kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup water at 110 F degrees (43 Celsius)
  • 1 cup whole milk at room temperature (or heavy cream)
  • 2 tablespoons active dry yeast Or 3 (1/4 oz.) packets
  • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar
  • 1 large egg at room temperature
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 3 tablespoons vegetable oil (Canola, avocado, and grapeseed oil would all work)
  • 5 cups all purpose flour (25 oz.) plus more for when kneading the dough and for the surface
  • 3 cups sesame seeds (12 oz.)
  • 7 tablespoons molasses diluted with 5 tablespoons of water

Instructions

  • Activate the yeast: Place water, milk, sugar, and active dry yeast into a measuring cup. Give it a quick whisk, cover it with stretch film, and let it sit on the counter for 10 to 15 minutes or until bubbles form on top.
  • Make the dough: Place 5 cups (700 grams) of all-purpose flour, kosher salt, oil, egg, and now-risen yeast-milk mixture in a large mixing bowl. Start mixing by hand until it comes together. Lightly dust the counter with flour and transfer the dough onto the surface. Knead by hand to form a smooth and elastic dough until the dough is not sticking to your fingers. This may take around 15 -17 minutes.
  • Let the simit dough rise: Lightly wet a kitchen towel with hot tap water and place it over the dough. Let it sit on the kitchen counter until it doubles in size, 30-45 minutes.
  • Toast sesame seeds: While the dough is rising, place sesame seeds in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat, stirring constantly, and toast until they turn golden brown, 20-25 minutes. Transfer into a large shallow plate to cool.
  • Roll The Dough into a Cylinder: Fold the dough from each end onto itself towards the middle, gently pinch, and roll into a cylinder of roughly 20-inches (51 cm.)
  • Using a sharp knife or a pastry scraper, divide the dough into 10 equal pieces, transfer onto a sheet pan (lined with parchment paper), and cover it with a clean kitchen towel (to prevent them from drying as you work on each piece)
  • Preheat the oven to 400 F degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
  • Shape the dough and let it rest: Roll each dough ball into a roughly 40-inch (102 cm) long strand. Fold the string onto itself using your finger to hold it in the middle. Twist the dough in the opposite direction to form a spiral rope. Roll it into a 5-inch diameter ring and gently pinch the end to seal.
  • Transfer the now-shaped simits onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Repeat the same process for the rest of the dough balls. Let them rest until they rise for 30 minutes. How much they rise depends on the temperature of your kitchen. (You can learn more about this in the tips section below)
  • Mix together molasses with water in a large shallow plate. Bring in the sesame seeds. First, dip simit into the molasses mixture (on both sides) and then into the sesame seeds making sure that all sides are fully covered with sesame seeds. Transfer onto a baking sheet and repeat the same process for the rest of the limit.
  • Bake both sheets in the oven for 18-20 minutes or until golden brown making sure to rotate them from top to bottom halfway through the baking process. Let them cool for 5 minutes and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • To store leftovers: Bring simit to room temperature, place in a plastic bag, remove the air out as much as you can, and store at room temperature. It should be fresh for up to 2 days. You can toast it for a few minutes before serving.
  • To freeze: Repeat the same process but place in the freezer instead. When ready to serve, let it thaw for 10 minutes on the counter, and then heat it in a preheated 300 F degree oven for 10-12 minutes.
  • The shape doesn’t matter:  If this is your first time trying your hand in making this Turkish simit recipe and if your simit strands don’t look like the ones in the pictures, do not worry. I promise that they will look better as they rise, and regardless of their appearance, they will taste great after they are baked. You will get the hang of it after you make it a few times.
  • The temperature of the water & milk: For the active dry yeast to get activated, your water must be around 110 F degrees (43 Celsius), and your milk (or heavy cream) is at room temperature. If they are colder or warmer, the yeast might not get activated, and as a result, your simit Turkish bread might fall flat.

Nutrition

Calories: 370kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 494mg | Potassium: 462mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 67IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 499mg | Iron: 7mg

This Turkish Simit recipe post was originally published in April of 2014. It has been updated with new photos and minor changes to the originally published recipe in March of 2020.

The post Turkish Simit Recipe with Step-by-Step Instructions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/simit/feed/ 82
Easy Tabbouleh Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-tabbouleh-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-tabbouleh-recipe/#comments Tue, 09 Mar 2021 19:10:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=39674 You cannot talk about Turkish cuisine and not mention bulgur wheat. And you cannot speak about bulgur recipes and not mention tabbouleh, also known as Middle Eastern Parsley salad. It is that simple. If you are new to cooking with bulgur and need a refresher, be sure to check out the posts I wrote on Types of Bulgur and How To Cook It based on the type you are using. ...

The post Easy Tabbouleh Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
You cannot talk about Turkish cuisine and not mention bulgur wheat. And you cannot speak about bulgur recipes and not mention tabbouleh, also known as Middle Eastern Parsley salad. It is that simple.

If you are new to cooking with bulgur and need a refresher, be sure to check out the posts I wrote on Types of Bulgur and How To Cook It based on the type you are using. 

Tabbouleh salad served in a bowl by a person from top view

In today’s post, I will share everything you need to know about making tabbouleh salad, including but not limited to the origin of it, ingredients and procedure (with step-by-step how-to photos), variations, along with my mom’s tips for the best tabouli recipe.

What Is It & Where Is It From?

Tabbouleh, also known as tabouli and tabouleh salad, is a fresh herb (mostly made with fresh parsley and mint) salad made with fine bulgur (parboiled crack wheat). It is mainly served as a meze or a side dish similar to other Middle Eastern recipes like Tzatziki sauce and Mediterranean hummus.

According to this article on tabbouleh from Wikipedia, it originated from the Levantine region – the large area in the Eastern Mediterranean region that consists of Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Palestine, Jordan, Turkey, and Iraq.

While most popular tabouli recipes are labeled as Lebanese, it is commonly made in the Middle Eastern (Arab countries) and Mediterranean regions (including Cyprus and Greece). 

What Is It Made Of?

To make it easier, I am breaking down the ingredients for my homemade tabouli recipe into four categories:

Fine Bulgur:

The authentic tabbouleh recipe uses fine bulgur, but if you cannot get your hands on it, you can also use medium-coarse and red bulgur for this recipe. The cooking method would be different, but it would still work.

Fine bulgur and the rest of the ingredients to soak bulgur to make Mediterranean Parsley salad

To soak fine bulgur, you will need boiling water, tomato paste, and salt.

If you want to purchase it online, this fine bulgur (affiliate link) is the one I always buy.

A Quick Note on The Amount of Bulgur I Use:

As I was doing my research for this recipe I realized that some of the Lebanese tabbouleh recipes online uses less bulgur than what I am accustomed to.

In my version of tabbouleh salad here, I am cooking 1 cup of fine bulgur but if you prefer yours less bulgur, feel free to cook less.The bulgur to water ratio I use is one to one and a quarter. In other words, I use 1 cup bulgur wheat to 1 1/4 cups of water.

If you decide to use less bulgur, be sure to adjust the amount accordingly.

Salad Ingredients:

  • Fresh Herbs:  I used a combination of fresh parsley (flat-leaf or Italian parsley), fresh mint, and fresh dill. Finely chopped.
Ingredients for the salad including Fresh herbs and scallion with fresh lemon

A quick note about the fresh herbs: Most authentic recipes feature parsley as the only herb, which is why it is also called Mediterranean Parsley Salad. However, the Turkish tabbouleh recipe (aka kisir)that I grew up eating was always made with a combination of fresh parsley, dill, and mint. With that being said, if you are not a fan of tabbouleh with mint or dill, you can easily substitute it with an equal amount of fresh parsley.

  • Scallions: Finely chopped with both green and white parts. It is not traditional, but you can substitute scallions with chopped red onions.


The Dressing:

The tabbouleh dressing is made with olive oil and lemon juice and seasoned with salt and pepper.

Person whisking tabouli dressing with lemon juice, olive oil, and salt and pepper

Optional Spices:

I kept my easy tabbouleh recipe simple and used only salt and pepper. However, my mom would always sprinkle it with sumac. I recommend using it if you have some, as it will add an additional layer of zesty flavor to the overall dish.

How To Cook Bulgur for Tabouli?

As I mentioned earlier, since fine bulgur is thin/small to cook, we prefer soaking it in hot water instead of boiling it on the stovetop. To do so:

  1. You will need a large bowl: Place fine bulgur in a large bowl (one that is big enough to make the salad)
Person showing how to cook bulgur wheat for tabouli
  1. Prep the liquid mixture: In a measuring cup, mix 1 ¼ cups of hot boiling water with 2 tablespoons of tomato paste and a teaspoon salt (I used Diamond kosher salt.)
  2. Pour it in: Pour the mixture into the bowl, making sure to cover the bulgur fully.
Soaked fine bulgur in a bowl
  1. Rest & Fluff: Let it soak for 10-15 minutes or until the liquid is fully absorbed and bulgur is cooked. Fluff it with a fork before adding the rest of the ingredients.

How To Make It?

Once the bulgur wheat is cooked, the rest of making Mediterranean salad is relatively easy. Simply:

person showing how to make bulgur wheat salad with step by step photos
  1. Make the tabbouleh dressing: Whisk together the freshly squeezed lemon juice with olive oil and salt and pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
  2. Chop the herbs & green onions: Prep the parsley, mint, dill, and scallions and place them on top of the soaked bulgur.
  3. Pour the dressing over & mix: Drizzle the salad with the dressing and give it a gentle mix to combine.
  4. Taste for seasoning and serve: Give it a taste and add in more if necessary. Serve.

Make-Ahead Instructions:

If you want to make it a day earlier, I recommend soaking the bulgur, chopping the herbs and scallions, and keeping them in an airtight container. You can also prep the dressing and store them separately in the fridge. 

When ready to serve, pour the dressing over and give the tabouli mix a gentle toss to combine.

Storage Tips & How Long Will It Keep In the Fridge?

To store, place your Mediterranean bulgur salad into an airtight container and place it in the fridge. It should stay fresh in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Keep in mind that this is one of those salads that gets better as it sits. I personally enjoy it more on the next day. For that reason, I usually make this easy tabbouleh recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.

A bowl of Middle Eastern tabbouleh salad recipe in a bowl with a wooden spoon on the side.

Variations:

The beauty of this Turkish tabbouleh is that it can be customized in various ways to make it match your taste buds. Here are a few variations you can try:

  • Tabbouleh without bulgur: If you prefer this recipe without bulgur or following a gluten-free diet, be sure to try my Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad recipe.
  • With Tomatoes and Cucumber: While it is not traditionally added into tabbouli, you can add half a cup of each chopped fresh tomato and cucumber into your tabbouleh.
  • Without Parsley: If you are not a fan of fresh parsley, you can substitute it with a combination of fresh mint and dill. If you do not prefer using fresh herbs, you can chop a few cups of romaine lettuce thinly and use that instead. 
  • Warm Tabbouleh Salad: You can serve this salad warm by heating it in the microwave for 15-30 seconds until it reaches the temperature of your liking.
  • Red bulgur tabbouleh: If you live in the US and shop for bulgur in the supermarkets, you will likely be able to find Bob’s Red Mills’ red bulgur. This Mediterranean bulgur and parsley salad can be made with red bulgur. However, I recommend following my detailed instructions on cooking red bulgur rather than soaking it.

Serving Suggestions & Calories:

The easy tabbouleh recipe below makes about 4 cups of tabbouleh. I thought it would be ideal to serve 1 cup per serving, which is about 386 calories.

What To Serve it With:

While it is traditionally served as a meze, I usually serve this Middle Eastern salad with bulgur as a side dish with meat and chicken dishes or as a light salad by itself. Below are a few recipes that I recommend to enjoy your salad:

Tabbouleh Salad in a bowl with a wooden spoon on the side top view
Print

Easy Tabbouleh Recipe

My mom's Easy Tabbouleh recipe made with fine bulgur, fresh parsley, mint and dill and drizzled with a zesty dressing. This vegan Mediterranean/Middle Eastern meze / side dish comes together in less than 30 minutes and can be enjoyed with meat and chicken dishes or by itself as a light and healthy meal.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Prep Time 15 minutes
Resting Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 cups/servings
Calories 386kcal

Ingredients

For The Fine Bulgur:

  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ¼ cups of boiling water
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 cup fine bulgur

For The Dressing:

  • ½ cup of olive oil
  • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Tabbouleh Salad:

  • 1 cup fresh parsley finely chopped
  • 1 cup fresh dill finely chopped*
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves roughly chopped*
  • 3-4 stalks of green onions chopped with both green and white parts

Instructions

  • In a measuring cup, whisk together tomato paste, water, and salt until fully combined.
  • Place fine bulgur in a large bowl and pour the mixture over it. Let it rest on the counter for 10-15 minutes or until the whole liquid is absorbed. Fluff it with a fork.
  • Meanwhile, make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, and salt and pepper.
  • Add in the herbs and scallions into the bowl and drizzle it with the dressing.
  • Give it a gentle toss, taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • A note on herbs: If you are not a fan of mint and dill, you can substitute them with an equal amount of fresh parsley.
  • A note on the amount of bulgur used: If you prefer using less bulgur, feel free to half the amount that is used. If you do so, soak 1/2 cup bulgur with 2/3 cups of boiling water mixed in with 1 tablespoon of tomato paste and 1/2 teaspoon salt.
  • Taste for seasoning: The recipe written here uses the least amount of salt, but be sure to taste it at the end to make sure that it is to your liking.
  • To store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and keep in the fridge up to 3 days.
  • Freezing? I would not recommend freezing tabbouleh salad.

Nutrition

Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 964mg | Potassium: 469mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 2626IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 85mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Easy Tabbouleh Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-tabbouleh-recipe/feed/ 4
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Tue, 02 Mar 2021 23:54:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 You can not talk about Turkish cuisine and not mention Bulgur Pilaf. If you have ever been there (or any other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean Country), you know this easy vegan side dish is a staple that we serve with almost all our meat dishes. In this post I will show you how to make Bulgur pilaf (as we call Bulgur Pilavi) in two different ways. First, the classic Tomato...

The post Bulgur Pilaf appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
You can not talk about Turkish cuisine and not mention Bulgur Pilaf. If you have ever been there (or any other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean Country), you know this easy vegan side dish is a staple that we serve with almost all our meat dishes.

In this post I will show you how to make Bulgur pilaf (as we call Bulgur Pilavi) in two different ways. First, the classic Tomato Bulgur Pilaf and then second the version of it made with Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli.

Bulgur pilaf in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Before I continue talking about this Turkish bulgur dish, I recommend that you check out my post on What is Bulgur Wheat where I covered everything you need to know about different types of bulgur, where to purchase it, and how it is different from crack wheat.

And if you’d rather cook bulgur in a more basic way, feel free to check out the post I wrote on How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice to learn how different types of bulgur are cooked differently (and why) along with other bulgur recipes to help you incorporate it in your daily cooking.

What Is Bulgur Pilaf?

Bulgur pilaf is a Turkish vegetarian (or vegan) side dish made by cooking bulgur with various vegetables, and water (or stock) on the stove top. With that being said, it is a staple in many other Middle Eastern countries including Lebanon and Syria.

In some circles, what we call bulgur pilaf is referred to as Turkish bulgur rice pilaf recipe as the method of cooking is very similar to cooking rice.

Ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe on a marble countertop

To make this Turkish Bulgur Pilaf recipe, you will need:

  • Coarse Bulgur Wheat #3: While I used coarse bulgur wheat to make this recipe, both medium coarse #2 and extra coarse #4 would work in the recipe.
  • Tomato & Tomato Paste: One medium size tomato cut into small cubes should be fine. You can also use a cup of canned diced tomatoes.
  • Onion: Chopped
  • Green pepper: Seeded jalapeno or green (or any other color) bell peppers would both work.
  • Chickpeas: I used a can of chickpeas to add in a bit more plant-protein into the recipe.
  • Cooking Liquid: You can use both water or vegetable stock.
  • Spices: I used ground cumin with salt and pepper

How To Prepare Bulgur for Making Pilaf? Should I rinse it before cooking?

While there is nothing special that you need to do to prepare it for cooking, most people wonder whether or not to rinse bulgur wheat before cooking

You cannot go wrong either way. It is a personal preference.

Growing up my mother always rinsed bulgur before cooking. Nowadays, if I am buying packaged bulgur I usually skip rinsing it. 

The only time I rinse bulgur before cooking is if I am buying it from the bulk bin section of our grocery store as they might get dusty easily.

How To Rinse Bulgur Wheat?

If you decide to rinse it, simply place it in a fine mesh strainer, rinse under cold running water for 30-45 seconds, and drain it before adding into the pot.

How To Cook It in Turkish Style?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe is truly easy and quick to make. Here is how you cook it:

person cooking onions in a pan
  1. Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 3-4 minutes. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
Person adding ingredients in the saucepan
  1. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in ground cumin, bulgur, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season with salt and pepper.
person cooking bulgur pilav in a pan
  1. Stir & Bring it to a boil: Give it a stir, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

If you can’t find coarse bulgur in your local supermarket, you can buy it on Amazon. This Turkish brand coarse bulgur (affiliate link) is the one I use and recommend.

Bulgur pilaf in a dutch oven with a wooden spoon the side.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

Bulgur pilaf with vermicelli was one of my mom’s signature dishes. While the bulgur pilaf made with tomato sauce is more of a traditional way of serving it, you can also make a more basic version with vermicelli. 

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil but as it is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it in medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in the vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock or a combination), salt and pepper and any vegetables (like I used in the recipe above) if you like. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
Bulgur with vermicelli in a dutch oven with a wooden spoon on the side

Don’t have vermicelli on hand? You can use orzo instead. No need to make any changes to the recipe or the way that it is cooked.

What Kind of Bulgur Wheat is Best? Can I cook this pilaf with other types of bulgur wheat?

Growing up, my mom always used coarse bulgur wheat (#3 or #4 & also known as pilavlik bulgur) to make this bulgur pilaf recipe. However, you can certainly make this dish using other types of bulgur, like fine bulgur (#1), red bulgur, or medium-coarse bulgur (#2).

The only difference would be the cooking time as listed below:

  • Fine bulgur – shorten cooking time by 3-4 minutes
  • Medium coarse bulgur – shorten cooking time by 2-3 minutes
  • Red Bulgur – treat it like it is medium-coarse bulgur and shorten cooking time by 2-3 minutes.

Do you feel confused about all these different kinds of bulgur? If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, but don’t know which one to get, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.

I made sure to explain everything you need to know about shopping for and cooking with bulgur wheat to help you feel confident about bulgur wheat.

A bowl of bulgur pilaf garnished with herbs and served with a spoon on the side

Helpful Tips from My Mom’s Recipe Book:

My mom used to refer to these tips as “the secret to making the best bulgur pilaf recipe.” 

  1. Use butter: Even though you can certainly make bulgur pilaf with only vegetable oil, my mom thought that using butter was the key to a good-tasting pilaf. She used 2 tablespoons of butter per 1-cup of bulgur.
    With that being said, if you want to make a vegan version of this bulgur pilaf recipe, you can omit the butter and use only vegetable oil instead.
  2. Use boiling water and/or homemade stock: Instead of using cold (or room temperature) water, she would use boiling water to make the cooking process faster. Also, if we had it available, she would substitute 1 cup of the 2 cups of liquid with chicken or vegetable stock.
  3. Let it rest: This was another big step. Once all the liquid was absorbed, she would remove the lid, cover it with a paper towel, and put the lid back on to rest for at least 5-10 minutes before serving. Then she would fluff it with a fork, taste it for seasoning, and add more if necessary.

How To Freeze?

To freeze this bulgur pilaf recipe simply bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and freeze up to 2 months.

Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.

What To Serve It With?

Traditionally, we serve this bulgur pilaf recipe as a side dish with chicken and meat dishes. However, below I do have some serving suggestions for those of you who are following a vegetarian diet as well.

As A Side Dish with Meat Dishes:

As A Vegetarian Dish With:

  • Tzatziki Sauce – A bowl of it on the side would be perfect
  • Yogurt Dressing – A drizzle of my yogurt salad dressing on top would be great
  • Cauliflower Curry – I use this simple bulgur pilaf recipe as a bedding for my favorite vegan recipe like this cauliflower curry recipe.

Other Recipes with Bulgur Wheat:

Bulgur pilaf in a bowl with a spoon in the dish
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

Learn how to make the best Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe with tomatoes and vegetables.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 18 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 4 servings (4 cups of cooked bulgur)
Calories 213kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water boiling water (or you can use vegetable stock)
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • handful of Italian or flat leaf parsley, chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion and green pepper and saute until translucent, 3-4 minutes. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in ground cumin, bulgur, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season with salt and pepper.
  • Stir & Bring it to a boil: Give it a stir, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  • Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Notes

  • Freezing Instructions: To freeze this bulgur pilaf recipe, simply bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in the vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 401mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

Other Turkish recipes you might like:

This post was originally published in September 2015 and updated with additional helpful information in March 2020.

The post Bulgur Pilaf appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 47
How To Cook Bulgur Wheat https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-bulgur/#comments Tue, 02 Mar 2021 22:40:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=39524 I recently published a post explaining what bulgur wheat is, where I did a deep dive into the types of bulgur, where it originated, how it is different from cracked wheat, it’s nutritional values, and where to find it. In this post, we are going back to basics again and covering how to cook bulgur wheat. Below you will find details on how to make my basic bulgur recipe based...

The post How To Cook Bulgur Wheat appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I recently published a post explaining what bulgur wheat is, where I did a deep dive into the types of bulgur, where it originated, how it is different from cracked wheat, it’s nutritional values, and where to find it.

In this post, we are going back to basics again and covering how to cook bulgur wheat. Below you will find details on how to make my basic bulgur recipe based on its type, along with instructions on cooking it on the stovetop, microwave, and rice cooker.

A bowl of bulgur garnished with flat leaf parsley.

If you are into Mediterranean & Middle Eastern cooking, be sure to check out all my Turkish recipes.

Water Ratio for Cooking:

Before I continue explaining how to cook bulgur I think it is important to provide you with the water to bulgur ratio for cooking my basic bulgur recipe. This ratio works for any type of bulgur regardless of its size, except when cooking it in a rice cooker.

I find that the ratio of 1 to 2, meaning 1 cup of bulgur to 2 cups of water, provides the best-cooked bulgur. 

Water, salt, and bulgur showing the ratio of bulgur to water

In short, the water-to-bulgur ratio for each method is below:

  • Soaking for extra fine (or fine) bulgur – 1:2 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 2 cups of boiling water/liquid
  • Stovetop – 1:2 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 2 cups of water/liquid
  • Microwave – 1:2 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 2 cups of water/liquid
  • Rice Cooker – 1:1 – 1 cup bulgur wheat to 1 cup of water/liquid

In terms of liquid, you can use a combination of water, chicken, or vegetable stock

Do I Need To Wash It Before Cooking?

The answer to this question is that it is up to you.

Growing up, my mom would always wash bulgur before cooking it. When I say wash, I mean she would put it in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water for 30-45 seconds before cooking it.

Nowadays, if I am buying packaged bulgur, I do not rinse it before cooking. The only time I give it a quick rinse is if I am using the bulgur that I purchased from the bulk bin, as it is sold in open containers and can get dusty quickly.

I do not feel any difference between rinsed and not rinsed bulgur after it is cooked in terms of taste.

Cooking Fine versus Coarse Bulgur:

If you have shopped for it before, you know that there are 4 common types of bulgur:

Types of bulgur wheat in small cips with their respective names on each side
  1. Fine bulgur also referred to as Extra Fine, Quick Cooking Bulgur, or #1 
  2. Medium Coarse Bulgur or #2 
  3. Coarse Bulgur or #3
  4. Extra Coarse Bulgur or #4 

While the basic cooking method for any type of bulgur wheat can be done by placing it into a saucepan with water, I prefer cooking fine bulgur differently than other types of bulgur. Because it is so small in size, I do not see any point in boiling it. 

Instead, I soak it.

How To Cook Fine Bulgur?

There is a reason why some people refer to fine bulgur as “quick-cooking bulgur.” Similar to the other types, it has a subtle nutty flavor. Since it is so small, you do not need to cook it on the stove. Instead, just soak it in hot liquid. Here is how:

Person showing how to cook fine bulgur
  1. Place a cup of fine bulgur into a large bowl and pour 2 cups of boiling hot water (or vegetable or chicken stock) over it. 
  2. Let it soak for 10-12 minutes. The cooking time for fine bulgur should be no longer 12 minutes but feel free to taste and let it sit longer if necessary.
Person fluffing bulgur with a fork
  1. Fluff it with a fork and use it in your recipe.

How To Cook Coarse Bulgur Wheat? The Stove Top Method:

Please know that the method of cooking I am listing below would work for medium-coarse, coarse grind, and extra-coarse bulgur. However, the cooking time might be slightly different depending on their size. 

You can find the timing according to the size of the bulgur below.

To Cook Coarse Bulgur on the stovetop:

person showing how to cook bulgur wheat with step by step shots
  1. Place coarse bulgur and water into a medium-size saucepan. If you want, you can add ¼ teaspoon of kosher salt for flavor.
  2. Bring it to a boil in medium heat, put the lid on, turn it down to low heat and let it cook until all (or most of the liquid) is absorbed.
Person fluffing cooked bulgur wheat with a fork
  1. Let it rest for 5 minutes and fluff it with a fork before using it in your recipe.

One cup of dry bulgur yields approximately 4 cups of cooked bulgur.

Do I need to soak coarse bulgur?

You can if you want. And it will soften as it soaks. 

However, because it takes no longer than 15-20 minutes from start to finish to cook it, I think soaking coarse bulgur is not a necessary step.

Cooking Time For Various Coarse Bulgur Types:

The times listed below are after the liquid comes to a full boil.

  • Medium coarse bulgur #2 takes about 12 minutes to cook
  • Coarse bulgur #3 takes between 12 to 14 minutes
  • Extra coarse bulgur #4 takes about 15 minutes

How About Cooking Red Bulgur?

If you live in the US and go to a supermarket to buy packaged bulgur, you will find out that the popular Bob’s Red Mill brand sells red bulgur.

The difference between regular yellow bulgur and red bulgur is that the yellow one is made from durum wheat (also known as pasta wheat) (source), and the red one is made from whole grain red wheat.

A jar of red bulgur with other types of bulgur in jars around it.

Compared to durum wheat, red wheat is softer, and because of that, it cooks faster. Therefore, the cooking time for red bulgur is slightly shorter. The cooking process is no different, and it takes about 12-13 minutes for it to cook.

In terms of nutrition and texture, red bulgur has a similar profile of vitamins and minerals and a chewy texture.

As you can see in the image, in terms of size, it is close to medium coarse bulgur (#2), and it takes about the same amount of time to cook.

Microwave Cooking Instructions:

Similar to cooking quinoa in a microwave, the fastest way to cook bulgur is in the microwave. From start to finish, it takes about 13 minutes to cook. 

The method I explain below was tested with medium bulgur (#2) as it is the most widely available in the US. 

The cook time for other coarse types might be 1-3 minutes, depending on the size, and should be adjusted accordingly.

To cook it in the microwave:

  1. Place 1 cup of bulgur in a large microwave-safe glass bowl. Pour two cups of water over it. If you want, you can add a pinch of salt as well.
  2. Put a microwave-safe plate or a lid over the bowl, making sure that it covers it entirely.
  3. Microwave bulgur on high for 5 minutes, carefully remove it from the microwave, give it a stir, put the lid on, and microwave for another 3 minutes. 
  4. When it is done, there might be some liquid in the bowl. That is normal. Remove it from the microwave and let it sit on the counter for 5 minutes. As it sits, the water will be fully absorbed. 
  5. Fluff it with a fork and serve.

One cup of uncooked coarse bulgur cooked in the microwave yields approximately 3 ⅓ cups of cooked bulgur.

Rice Cooker Cooking Instructions:

I find that cooking bulgur wheat in a rice cooker is convenient as there is no need to tend it. It takes longer, 45-50 minutes, compared to all other cooking methods, but I appreciate the fact that there is no need to babysit it.

I tested the recipe below in my Aroma Rice Cooker (affiliate link), both with medium-coarse and coarse bulgur and the cooking time was not much different. 

To Cook it in a Rice Cooker:

  1. Place 1 cup of bulgur wheat and 1 cup of water in the bowl of your rice cooker. 
  2. Secure the lid and set it to cook on brown rice setting.
  3. It should take somewhere between 45-55 minutes from start to finish. 

Depending on the rice cooker you are using, there might be slight differences in settings. I tested this recipe using both the white rice and brown site settings, and the results in terms of cook time and taste were not different.

One cup of uncooked bulgur cooked in a rice cooker yields approximately 3 ½ cups of cooked bulgur.

How To Cook It Turkish Style?

Even though I am sharing a detailed post on how to cook bulgur like rice, I never cooked it this way until I moved to the US. 

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf in a bowl with a spoon on the side

My Turkish mom always cooked it like rice, and we called it Bulgur Pilaf. It is what she served as a side dish with almost every meal.

I wrote a whole detailed post on how to cook Turkish Bulgur Pilaf and use bulgur as a rice substitute, so be sure to check that out for more information on cooking it like rice.

What if I am Cooking it for tabouli?

In Turkey, we use extra fine bulgur for tabouli salad (aka fresh herb and bulgur salad widely popular in Middle Eastern cuisine). This is not to say you can not use other varieties, but that is just how my mom (and many other Turkish cooks) did/does.

As it is with any other grain, while cooking fine bulgur, you can use any type of liquid you want to match your recipe’s flavor profile.

Person showing how to soak fine bulgur wheat to make tabbouleh

For example, if you are cooking bulgur wheat for tabouli, you can mix in a few tablespoons of tomato paste and salt into the boiling water and soak it in that mixture. This way, your tabbouleh salad will have a nice tomato-ey flavor that carries throughout the whole dish.

The same goes for soaking it in chicken or vegetable broth. The important thing here is to make sure that the liquid is boiling hot so that bulgur will cook quickly.

You can soak it in non-boiling liquid, but it will take longer to soften/cook.

Freezing Instructions:

You might ask, can you freeze cooked bulgur. The answer is yes, and here is how you can do it:

  1. Bring cooked bulgur wheat to room temperature.
  2. Line a sheet of parchment paper on a baking sheet. Spread the cooked bulgur evenly in a single layer.
  3. Place the sheet in the freezer. Freeze for at least 2 hours or until frozen. 
  4. Remove and place it in an airtight container or freezer bag (just be sure to remove the air from it)

Should Bulgur Wheat Be Crunchy?

No, it should not. Instead, it should be soft and slightly chewy similar to brown rice.

What Is A Good Substitute?

My favorite substitute for bulgur is quinoa, especially if you are looking for a gluten-free alternative.

While they taste quite different, I like that they offer a pretty similar texture when used in recipes. Therefore, recipes like the popular tabouli can be made with quinoa.

Wheat berries, farro, and barley can also be a great substitute for bulgur. If you need more substitution ideas, be sure to check our article on Bulgur Substitutes.

Do you have a favorite bulgur brand you recommend?

I usually buy bulgur from a local Turkish supermarket. However, if I don’t have time to go there, I usually order it online. Below are brands that I use and recommend. Please know that these are affiliate links:

Both of these brands offer various types of bulgur you can use in your cooking. I have used and continue to use and recommend them.

Recipe Ideas:

Now that you have some cooked bulgur, here are a few ways to use it in recipes:

  1. Basic Seasoned Bulgur Bowl: The most straightforward way to serve is to place this basic bulgur recipe in a bowl, drizzle it with olive oil, a squeeze of lemon juice, salt, and pepper. If you have it, you can also sprinkle it with chopped flat-leaf parsley and or fresh mint. You can serve it with a drizzle of yogurt dressing or a bowl of Tzatziki sauce on the side.
  2. Serve it as a side dish: I usually serve it with Ina’s Pot RoastChicken Fricassee, and even with my Orange Chicken with Fennel.
  3. Add into salads: Add a cup of cooked bulgur into any of your favorite salad recipes as a grain to make it more filling and meal-worthy. This Butternut Squash and Bulgur Wheat Salad is a great example.
  4. Use it as stuffing vegetables: One of my favorite vegetables to stuff is stuffed peppers. This Middle Eastern Stuffed Peppers recipe is one that I make often.
  5. Add it in soups, stews, and stir-fries: One of my favorite ways to use bulgur is by adding it to vegetarian/vegan recipes to mimic the texture of meat. This Vegan Chili recipe is an excellent example of this.
  6. For Breakfast: Try this Bulgur Breakfast Bowls recipe from my friends at Give Recipe.

Other Basic Grain Recipes You Might Like:

Cooked bulgur wheat placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side
Print

How To Cook Bulgur Wheat Recipe

Learn how to cook bulgur wheat with step by step instructions based on the type of bulgur you are using. This recipe includes cooking times for each type of bulgur.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Prep Time 3 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 cups
Calories 120kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup bulgur medium-coarse, coarse, or extra coarse bulgur
  • 2 cups water you can also use vegetable/chicken stock
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place bulgur, water, and salt into a medium-size saucepan over medium heat.
  • Give it a stir.
  • Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low and cook until the liquid is absorbed. For medium coarse bulgur (#2), cooking time should be around 12 minutes, for coarse bulgur (#3), cooking time should be 12-14 minutes, and for extra coarse bulgur (#4) cooking time should be around 15 minutes.
  • Once cooked, let it rest for 5-10 minutes with the lid on off the heat.
  • Fluff it with a fork and serve.

Notes

Microwave Method:
  1. Place 1cup bulgur and 2 cups of water in a large microwave-safe bowl. Cover it with a plate large enough to cover it fully.
  2. Microwave for 5 minutes, carefully remove from the microwave, give it a stir, put the plate back on, and cook for another 3 minutes.
  3. When it is done, there might be some liquid in the bowl. That is normal. Remove it from the microwave and let it sit on the counter for 5 minutes. As it sits, the water will be fully absorbed.
Rice Cooker Method:
  1. Place 1 cup of bulgur wheat and 1 cup of water in the bowl of your rice cooker. 
  2. Secure the lid and set it to cook on brown rice setting.
  3. It should take somewhere between 45-55 minutes from start to finish.
  4. Fluff it with a fork and serve.
How To Cook Fine Bulgur:
I prefer soaking fine bulgur (#1) instead of cooking it as it is so small. To cook fine bulgur using my soaking method:
  1. Place a cup of fine bulgur into a large bowl and pour 2 cups of boiling hot water over it. 
  2. Let it soak for 10-12 minutes. The cooking time for fine bulgur should be no longer 12 minutes but feel free to taste and let it sit longer if necessary.
  3. Fluff it with a fork and use it in your recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 157mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Cook Bulgur Wheat appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-bulgur/feed/ 36
What is Bulgur Wheat? https://foolproofliving.com/what-is-bulgur-wheat/ https://foolproofliving.com/what-is-bulgur-wheat/#comments Tue, 02 Mar 2021 21:02:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=39409 If you are interested in Middle Eastern or Mediterranean cooking, chances are that you have heard of bulgur (also referred to as burghul and bulgar.) In Turkey, recipes like bulgur pilaf and tabouli (kisir as we call in Turkish) were a staple in our house.  After I moved to the US, I realized that most people don’t know what bulgur is. Because of that they are intimidated by it. They are also confused about...

The post What is Bulgur Wheat? appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you are interested in Middle Eastern or Mediterranean cooking, chances are that you have heard of bulgur (also referred to as burghul and bulgar.) In Turkey, recipes like bulgur pilaf and tabouli (kisir as we call in Turkish) were a staple in our house. 

After I moved to the US, I realized that most people don’t know what bulgur is. Because of that they are intimidated by it. They are also confused about what to buy at the grocery store when a recipe calls for bulgur. 

Bulgur wheat placed in jars in a kitchen setting

I thought it would be helpful if I were to create a guide for bulgur, where I explain everything you need to know about it, including what is it made of, types of bulgur, where to find it in supermarkets (and online), health/nutritional benefits (including protein value & calories), and recipe ideas to use it in your daily cooking.

I hope that with the help of this guide, from now on, you will be able to shop for bulgur and use it in your daily cooking with confidence.

After you learn all these basics, be sure to check out my detailed post of How To Cook Bulgur wheat with step by step instructions, tips and tricks, and recipe ideas to use it in. And if you are interested in Middle Eastern cooking, be sure to check all my Turkish recipes.

What is it made of? Is Cracked wheat and bulgur the same thing?

You cannot define bulgur wheat without first defining cracked wheat as they are pretty the same thing with one big difference.

Then you might ask, what is cracked wheat? 

According to this article I found on Dr. Weil, cracked wheat are whole wheat berries made by milling them into smaller pieces. This process reduces cooking time while preserving the nutrient and fiber-packed bran and germ layers. 

On the other hand, bulgur wheat is cracked wheat that is parboiled, dried, and then broken into various smaller pieces. This is why, when you look for bulgur you see most brands specify the type of bulgur on the packaging as fine (or also referred to as extra fine), medium-coarse, coarse, or extra coarse bulgur.

Additionally, the fact that bulgur wheat is cut into smaller pieces makes bulgur a quick-cooking grain. However, the process and time of cooking change depending on its size. 

To answer the initial question, crack wheat and bulgur are essentially the same things, but bulgur is parboiled (or steamed) during the processing. This is why bulgur cooks faster than crack wheat.

Different sizes of bulgar wheat placed in four bowls from the top view

Is bulgur whole wheat? 

Yes, it is, and the best explanation I was able to find comes from this article I found on Wikipedia:

“Bulgur is made from the cracked parboiled groats of several different species, most often durum wheat.”

If you are not familiar, durum wheat (also called pasta or macaroni wheat) is the second most cultivated wheat globally. 

Additionally, according to this article on Healthline, it is considered a whole grain because the entire wheat kernel; including the germ, endosperm, and bran, is eaten.

Is it Gluten-Free?

Since it is made from wheat, bulgur is not gluten-free. If you have celiac disease and/or follow a gluten-free diet, I would not recommend consuming bulgur. If you need a gluten free alternative for bulgur, be sure to check out our article on the best Bulgur Substitutes.

Where is it from?

While the specific country of origin is unknown, it is believed that it was born in the Levant region – the large area in the Eastern Mediterranean region that consists of Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Palestine, Jordan, Turkey, and Iraq.

With that being said, according to this article on Wikipedia, it is commonly used in Indian and Pakistani cuisine as a cereal to make sweet or savory porridge.

Types of Bulgur:

When you go to the store or search for it for purchasing it online, you will see that bulgur comes in different sizes. As I explained earlier, this is because bulgur is cut into various sizes during its production.

Various sizes of bulgur wheat placed in bowls with their names written next to them.

I think this is one of the main reasons why most people feel confused about which one to get for the dish they are making that calls for bulgur.

Bulgur Wheat comes in four different types and there are fine, medium coarse, coarse, and extra coarse bulgur.

Below you will find each type of bulgur with popular uses of recipes that you may have heard of. 

If you want to learn more about cooking each of these various sizes of bulgur, be sure to check out my post on How To Cook Bulgur Wheat.

Fine Bulgur: 

Also called quick-cooking bulgur and extra-fine bulgur, this is the smallest size of bulgur. Some brands also advertise it as #1.

Extra fine bulgur in a bowl

In Turkish cuisine, this is what we use in making kisir (aka tabbouleh salad). Since it is so small, it cooks the fastest compared to its medium and coarse varieties.

While some other Middle Eastern countries cook it like rice on the stovetop, in Turkish cuisine, we soak fine bulgur in boiling hot water for about 10 minutes instead of cooking it on the stovetop in a pan. 

Medium Coarse Bulgur:

Medium-coarse bulgur is the most widely available type of bulgur in the US. This is the variety of bulgur you find in the bulk bins of most supermarket chains. Some brands advertise it as #2.

Medium coarse and red bulgur from in bowls from the top view

As the name suggests, it is medium coarse. In other words, in terms of its size, it is between fine and coarse.

Medium coarse bulgur can be used to make bulgur pilaf, porridge and as an addition to various stuffing, salad, meatball, soup, stew, and stir fry recipes. 

While I am sure there are exceptions, you can use medium-coarse bulgur in many recipes where you use rice, quinoa, and couscous.

Red Bulgur – How is it different than the regular kind?

There is also red bulgur, which is also considered a medium-coarse cut. Bob’s Red Mill sells red bulgur and advertises it as a quick-cooking whole grain in the US.

As the name implies, red bulgur is darker in color. It is made from whole grain red wheat, which is softer than yellow bulgur made from durum wheat (the hardest of all wheat.)

Person scooping red bulgur in a jar

Because of that, technically, it cooks faster compared to bulgur made from durum wheat. However, during my recipe testings in my own kitchen, I found that the difference in time was no longer than a few minutes. 

Coarse & Extra Coarse Bulgur:

These are the largest size when it comes to types of bulgur. They are also advertised as #3 & #4. In Turkey, we refer to coarse bulgur as pilavlik bulgur, which means bulgur used for making pilaf.

Due to being the largest bulgur type, it takes the longest to cook. If you want to cook bulgur like rice, I find that this is the best type of bulgur to use.

Coarse bulgur placed in a bowl close up

With that being said, depending on the recipe that you are using, the time difference in cooking between medium-coarse and coarse bulgur is usually no longer than 2-4 minutes. 

This is why, in general, you can use medium-coarse and coarse bulgur interchangeably and cook them the same way. A great example of this is my tomato bulgur pilaf recipe. Either type of bulgur can be used to make bulgur pilaf and deliver great results.

What Does It Taste Like?

Bulgur has an earthy and nutty flavor. It has a satisfying chewy texture, which is why it is usually served as a side dish for chicken and meat dishes in the Middle Eastern Cuisine. This is also why bulgur makes the best stuffing/filling in vegetarian recipes, similar to how I used it in this Middle Eastern Stuffed Peppers recipe.

Nutrition Facts:

According to this article in Healthline, because it is minimally processed, it is a nutritious grain than more refined wheat products. It is high in fiber and offers a variety of vitamins and minerals.

A bowl of cooked bulgur garnished with parsley

1 cup (182 grams) of cooked bulgur offers (source 1 & source 2):

  • Calories: 151
  • Carbs: 34 grams
  • Protein: 5.6 grams – 11% of the Daily Intake
  • Fat: 0 grams
  • Fiber: 8 grams
  • Folate: 8% of the Daily Intake 
  • Vitamin B6: 8% of the DI
  • Niacin: 9% of the DI
  • Manganese: 55% of the DI
  • Magnesium: 15% of the DI
  • Iron: 10% of the DI

As you can see above, bulgur is rich in manganese. This mineral has many health benefits, including but not limited to improving bone health and blood sugar regulation and reducing inflammation. (Source)

Where to find it in the supermarket?

Nowadays, you can easily find bulgur in the international section (Mediterranean or Middle Eastern sections) of most supermarkets. I also recommend looking for it in bulk bins in major supermarkets like Whole Foods and Fresh Market.

Different brands and sizes of it in packages

You can also find it online on Amazon. Below are the brands my mom used and I still use to this day (These are affiliate links):

Storage & Shelf Life

Bulgur should be stored in an airtight container and protected from light, heat, and moisture. As it is with any other whole grain, as long as it is properly stored, it should be fresh for up to 24 months.

What do I do with it? Recipe Ideas:

Now that you know what to look for and which type of bulgur to buy, here are a few ways I recommend using it in your daily cooking:

A recipe idea to use it in
  1. Enjoy it simply by boiling in water similar to the way you cook rice or pasta. Check out my post on how to cook coarse bulgur perfectly for more information.
  2. Make Bulgur Pilaf
  3. Add a cup of cooked bulgur wheat to salads. If you need inspiration, you can use it in all my quinoa salad recipes in place of quinoa.
  4. Make tabbouleh 
  5. Add it into soups to give it a texture & to thicken – An excellent example of this is my Vegan Chili, where I used to provide the meaty texture to compensate for the lack of ground beef.

The post What is Bulgur Wheat? appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/what-is-bulgur-wheat/feed/ 14
Chicken Rice Pilaf with Fresh Herbs (Turkish Style) https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-pilaf-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-pilaf-recipe/#comments Mon, 21 Dec 2020 05:53:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5305 Today’s recipe, Chicken Rice Pilaf, comes from my mother’s cookbook that I inherited after her passing. This easy pilaf recipe was her specialty that she would make during the holiday season. It is the newest addition to my collection of easy Turkish recipes. Nowadays, I make it every time I make chicken stock and/or have some leftover shredded chicken that I want to use. With that being said, I wrote...

The post Chicken Rice Pilaf with Fresh Herbs (Turkish Style) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Today’s recipe, Chicken Rice Pilaf, comes from my mother’s cookbook that I inherited after her passing. This easy pilaf recipe was her specialty that she would make during the holiday season. It is the newest addition to my collection of easy Turkish recipes.

Nowadays, I make it every time I make chicken stock and/or have some leftover shredded chicken that I want to use. With that being said, I wrote the recipe below in a way that shows you how to prepare and cook chicken from scratch just in case you do not have leftover chicken on hand.

Chicken and Rice Pilaf garnished with fresh herbs on an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

I serve this dish as an entree, but it could also be served as a side dish with chicken recipes

What Is Rice Pilaf, and how is it different from rice?

If you do a quick search online, you will see that the term “pilaf” has many names depending on the cuisine it is featured in. In Turkey, we call it pilav, whereas, in other countries, it has been referred to as plov, pilau, and pilaf. They are essentially the same thing, white (mostly long-grain or jasmine rice) cooked with aromatics.

The difference between “rice” and “rice pilaf” is the technique that is used for cooking them. Rice is cooked by first boiling water and then adding rice in it without any additional flavorings. Whereas, rice pilaf is cooked by first sautéing rice with aromatics like butter, spices, onion, garlic, etc., and then cooking it in water/broth. 

In the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisines, rice pilaf is usually cooked by sauteing orzo or vermicelli noodles with butter before adding in the rice.

Chicken Thighs and Rice Pilaf in a dutch oven from the top view.

What Kind of Rice Do You Use In This Recipe?

The type of rice I used in this recipe is long-grain white rice. To me, long-grain white rice provides me with a similar taste to my mom’s chicken pilaf recipe.

Ingredients:

This easy chicken pilaf recipe has two sets of ingredients. The first set is for the chicken and the second set is for the rice pilaf.

For The Chicken:

Ingredients for chicken plov laid out on a marble counter

As I mentioned earlier, I usually make this chicken pilaf when I have leftover store-bought rotisserie chicken or if I have some leftover from making chicken stock. Feel free to skip cooking the chicken (and the chicken ingredients) if you are using leftover chicken as well.

If not, gather bone-in chicken thighs, onion, garlic, lemon juice, and water. 

For The Rice Pilaf:

To cook the chicken rice pilaf, you will need butter, orzo, long-grain white rice, allspice, ground cinnamon, pine nuts, and water (or chicken stock).

Greek chicken and rice ingredients from the top view.

You will also need dried currants, scallions, fresh dill, and fresh herbs to flavor and garnish this chicken rice pilaf recipe. 

Substitutions for Ingredients:

  • Chicken: I used chicken thighs, but you can also use chicken breast or drumsticks. I prefer using a bone-in chicken to provide more flavor, but any chicken you have on hand would work in this recipe.
    I usually remove the skin, but it is a personal preference, and either way would work.
  • Dried Currants: If you cannot find dried currants, you can also use dried golden raisins.
  • Orzo: You can substitute orzo with vermicelli noodles.
  • Pine nuts: You can use sliced or slivered almonds in place of pine nuts.

Step By Step Instructions – How To Make It:

The recipe for this stove-top rice pilaf has three folds. 

The first one is cooking the chicken, the second one is cooking the rice pilaf with aromatics, and then the final step is garnishing it with fresh herbs, currants, and scallions.

How To Prepare Chicken?

Start with cooking chicken thighs with the aromatics. To do so:

Showing how to cook the chicken
  1. Prep the chicken: Place chicken thighs, onion, garlic, lemon juice, 1-teaspoon salt, and water in a saucepan with a lid over medium heat.
  2. Bring it to a boil & let it simmer: Once it comes to a boil, lower the heat and let it simmer until the chicken is cooked through, skimming off any foam collected on the top. This should take about 20-25 minutes.
Person shredding the chicken with two forks
  1. Shred the chicken: Reserve a cup of the liquid to use to cook the rice. Using two forks, shred the chicken into small bite-sized pieces. Set aside. Discard the rest of the liquid, bones, and cooked vegetables.

Soak Currants:

To me, what makes this chicken rice pilaf so special is the addition of currants. The sweetness coming from dried currants mixed in with pine nuts and fresh herbs transforms this otherwise boring rice pilaf recipe into incredibly flavorful rice pilaf. Soaking them in hot water allows them to plump up. 

Person soaking dried currants

All you have to do is to place them in a bowl and pour over some boiling water and let them sit while you are cooking the chicken and rice.

How to make rice pilaf on the stove?

Start working on cooking the rice pilaf as your chicken is cooking. To cook rice pilaf on the stove, simply:

Person showing how to make rice pilaf with orzo
  1. Saute orzo with unsalted butter: Heat butter in a Dutch oven (or any other heavy bottom pot with a lid) over medium heat. Add orzo and cook, stirring constantly until it is browned. This will take about 5-7 minutes, and your kitchen will smell amazing. Don’t be alarmed if your orzo looks like it is burned a little bit. That is fine. 
  2. Add the rest of the flavoring agents & rice: Stir in allspice, cinnamon, pine nuts, and white rice. Sautee, stirring constantly for 6-7 minutes. Make sure that the rice is thoroughly mixed in the rest of the ingredients. Season with salt and pepper.
  3. Pour in the liquid: Add 1 cup of the reserved liquid (from cooking the chicken) and 2 ⅓ cups of boiling water over the rice. Give it a stir. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to low, cover tightly with the lid, and simmer for 20 minutes or until all the water is absorbed.

Garnish & Let It Rest:

Once the pilaf is cooked, remove the lid and top it off with the shredded chicken, drained currants, fresh chopped parsley, dill, and scallions.

Easy rice pilaf with chicken in a dutch oven from the top view.

Put the lid back on and let it rest for 15 minutes. The steam in the cooked rice will warm up the chicken. 

How To Serve?

After it is rested, give it a gentle toss and make sure the fresh herbs and chicken are mixed in with the rice pilaf. 

I usually serve this chicken pilaf recipe as a centerpiece in a large oval serving or casserole dish. With all the sweet and savory ingredients, it makes the most delicious looking holiday dish. While it is optional, I also recommend seasoning it with a generous amount of freshly ground black pepper at the very end. That is exactly how my mom served this Turkish pilaf with chicken recipe.

Alternatively, you can serve it with vegetable sides such as Butter Garlic Green Beans, Instant Pot Carrots, or Roasted Sweet Potatoes.

Variations:

  • Baked Chicken and Rice Pilaf: Alternatively, you can use this rice pilaf to stuff a whole chicken (like you would do with turkey) and cook it in the oven. If you prefer to do that, skip cooking the chicken separately and cook the pilaf as it is written in the recipe. Fill the cavity of your chicken with the cooked pilaf and roast it in the oven. When ready to serve, garnish with the fresh herbs and scallions.
  • Chicken Rice Pilaf Casserole: If you follow the recipe below, you will see that I took advantage of the steam in the pot and warmed the chicken on top of the cooked rice. Alternatively, you can place the cooked rice in a casserole dish, top it off with the shredded chicken, and warm it up in a 300 degrees F oven for 15-20 minutes.

How To Store Leftovers? & How To Freeze?

Leftovers kept in an airtight container in the fridge should keep fresh up to 3 days. When reheating, you might have to add some water into the rice.

I have never been able to be successful with freezing rice. You can technically freeze this dish, but it becomes so mushy that I would not recommend freezing it.

Other Chicken Recipes You Might Also Like:

There you have it, friends, an easy healthy rice pilaf recipe that is (to me) the best way to use leftover chicken. If you are adventurous in the kitchen and want to try chicken recipes from all over the world, here are a few other recipes you might also like:

Chicken Rice Pilaf Recipe in a dutch oven
Print

Chicken Rice Pilaf Recipe

This Chicken Rice Pilaf recipe is an easy to make one pot recipe that is flavored with currants, all spice and pine nuts. While in the recipe below, I cook my chicken from scratch, It is also a great way to use leftover chicken for a filling and flavorful meal.
Course Main Course
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 567kcal

Ingredients

To Cook The Chicken:

  • 1 1/2 pounds bone-in chicken thighs washed skins removed
  • 1 large or 2 small onions, cut into 4 pieces
  • 2 cloves of garlic cut into smaller pieces
  • 2 tablespoons of lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 8 cups of water

For The Currants:

  • 1/4 cup dried currants
  • 1 cup water

For The Rice:

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1/4 cup orzo
  • 1 1/2 teaspoons all spice
  • 1/2 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1/2 cup pine nuts
  • 1 1/2 cup long-grain rice rinsed thoroughly
  • 2 1/3 cup water boiling hot

As Garnish:

  • 1/2 cup fresh dill roughly chopped
  • 1/2 cup fresh parsley roughly chopped
  • 2 stalks of scallions (green parts only) – chopped
  • 1 tsp kosher salt
  • 1/2 tsp ground black pepper

Instructions

Cook the chicken and make a quick chicken stock:

  • Place chicken thighs, onion, garlic, lemon juice, 1-teaspoon salt, and water in a large pot. Bring it to a boil, and then gently simmer (in medium-low heat) until the chicken is cooked through, skimming and discarding the foam from the top as you go, 25-30 minutes.
  • Transfer the chicken thighs to a plate, and allow them to cool for 10 minutes. Using two forks shred them into smaller and thinner strips. Cover with aluminum foil and set aside. Discard the bones. Reserve 1 cup of the liquid that the chicken was cooked in.

Soak Currants:

  • Place currants in a small bowl and pour boiling water over it. Set aside.

Cook the rice:

  • Heat the butter in a large pan. Add orzo, and cook, stirring constantly, until brown. It will look like it is (almost) burning. This will take 5-7 minutes.
  • Add the allspice, cinnamon, pine nuts, and rice. Cook in medium heat, stirring constantly for 6-7 minutes, making sure that the rice is thoroughly mixed with orzo and spices.
  • Add 1 cup of the reserved liquid and 2 1/3 cups of boiling water, 1-teaspoon salt and 1/2 teaspoon black pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to low, cover tightly with the lid, and simmer for 20 minutes or until all the water is absorbed.

Garnish and rest:

  • Remove from the heat. Open the lid, place the shredded chicken on top of the rice. Drain the currants and scatter it on top of the chicken.
  • Top it off with the fresh herbs and scallions on top of the chicken and currants. Put the lid back on and let it rest (steam) for 15 minutes.
  • Give it a gentle mix making sure that the shredded chicken pieces are equally distributed within the dish. Place it in a serving or casserole dish,
  • When ready to serve, season it with freshly grounded black pepper.

Notes

  • The amount of water and time to cook the rice may differ based on the brand you use. Check for the cooking directions on the package for the right amount of water and time to cook the rice.
  • I used 1 cup of the liquid that the chicken was cooked in to enhance the chicken flavor and subtracted that 1 cup from the total amount of water I needed to cook the rice.

Nutrition

Calories: 567kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 497mg | Potassium: 702mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1219IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 87mg | Iron: 3mg

This Chicken Rice recipe was originally published in December of 2014. It has been updated with new information and photos with no changes made to the originally published recipe.

The post Chicken Rice Pilaf with Fresh Herbs (Turkish Style) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-pilaf-recipe/feed/ 7
Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Fri, 17 Apr 2020 07:48:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Having grown up in a Mediterranean country tabbouleh, or as we call it kisir, was a staple in our house. However, in my version here I am making tabbouleh with quinoa instead of the traditional ingredient, bulgur. If you do a quick Google search, you will see that people gave this Middle Eastern classic salad different names. Some call it “tabbouleh” some “tabouli.” I guess the different spelling is because...

The post Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Having grown up in a Mediterranean country tabbouleh, or as we call it kisir, was a staple in our house. However, in my version here I am making tabbouleh with quinoa instead of the traditional ingredient, bulgur.

If you do a quick Google search, you will see that people gave this Middle Eastern classic salad different names. Some call it “tabbouleh” some “tabouli.” I guess the different spelling is because it is a strange word for the English language.

Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad served in a big bowl with a spoon on the side

But even with its various names, this fresh herb salad continued to be a regular dish in many households. Even celebrities made variations of it like it is with this Jennifer Aniston Friends Salad recipe.

Recipe Ingredients

Whichever way you prefer to call it, the authentic/traditional tabbouleh recipe is made by mixing together fresh herbs like Italian parsley, mint, and dill along with scallions and thin bulgur. The dressing for the salad is made by whisking a little bit of lemon juice with olive oil and salt and pepper.

Ingredients for tabouli quinoa salad being served by a woman

Throughout the years, people made changes to the original recipe by adding ingredients like tomatoes, cucumber, tomato paste, roasted red pepper paste, pomegranate molasses, and even feta cheese (see Ina’s recipe here).

In my version here, I am joining the crowd by switching bulgur with quinoa to make my tabouli quinoa salad. Because let’s face it, thin bulgur is not the easiest-to-find ingredient in American supermarkets.

And to be quite honest, having been eating tabbouleh all my life, I can vouch for tabbouleh made with quinoa being just as good as the traditional recipe made with bulgur.

I also like the fact that being gluten-free and vegan, this healthy salad makes the perfect protein-rich summer dinner recipe.

How To Make Tabbouleh with Quinoa

As you can see in the video below in the recipe card, this Middle Eastern quinoa salad recipe has 4 folds.

  1. Cook the quinoa: You can cook quinoa in a microwave, rice cooker, Instant pot or on the stove top. I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
  2. Prep all the ingredients: Chop all the fresh herbs (mint, parsley, and dill) and scallions. I also added a cup of tomatoes and a small cucumber, because it is the end of summer and fresh tomatoes and cucumbers are in abundance. However, you can omit them if you don’t have any. Collect everything in a large salad bowl.
  3. Make the tabouli dressing: Simply mix together olive oil, lemon juice, and salt and pepper. I personally like my quinoa tabouli with a lot of lemon juice, but in the recipe below I was conservative thinking that not everybody likes it the way I do. That is why I recommend tasting your quinoa tabouli at the end and adding more if you feel necessary.
  4. Assemble: Drizzle the salad with the dressing and give it a mix.

I’ll admit it does include some chopping, but in the end, it is an easy-to-make and refreshing gluten-free and vegan salad recipe you can make in less than 30 minutes.

PRO TIP: While rinsing quinoa might sound like an extra step, it is quite necessary for avoiding the bitter taste of quinoa (caused by its outer layer, saponin). If you need a refresher or want to learn more about it, check out my blog post on how to wash quinoa (with or without a strainer).

A woman is mixing a bowl of tabbouleh quinoa salad

How To Chop Parsley For Tabouli

As I was doing my research for this recipe, I saw some people recommending chopping herbs in a food processor. Quite honestly, I am not a big fan of doing so as I think it will bruise them.

Instead, I find that the easiest way to chop fresh herbs is to make a bouquet of them and then chop them all together using a sharp knife. Once they are all chopped up, go over them one last time to make sure that if there are any larger leaves left behind, they are minced as well.

In terms of the stems: If you don’t mind the additional work, you can tear up the leaves of the herbs and leave the stems out. I personally don’t mind them because since we are mincing them they get lost in the salad. Still, it is totally up to you.

Tabouli Calories – Tabbouleh Made with Bulgur versus Quinoa

The quinoa tabouli recipe below serves 4 people. The calorie count per serving is 311 calories. If you were to make this exact recipe using bulgur, it would be 349 calories.

Even though both quinoa and bulgur are high in protein, quinoa has the upper hand when it comes to protein intake per serving, almost double the amount in bulgur.

What To Serve With This Recipe

Quinoa Tabbouleh is traditionally served as a side dish, mostly with meat dishes, borek, and even as a vegan main course, especially when it is hot outside. Below are a few dishes I would serve quinoa tabouli with:

can you make tabbouleh with quinoa - a bowl of salad recipe photographed from the front

Variations:

One of my favorite things about this easy tabbouleh recipe with quinoa is that it is so easy to customize and make it your own. Here are a few variations of this salad that you can try:

  • Quinoa Parsley Salad: If you are not a big fan of mixing herbs, try using just one herb. My favorite in the bunch is parsley. I made this salad with only parsley, and it was still delicious.
  • Quinoa Tabbouleh with Chickpeas: If you want to make to turn this into a filling and meal-worthy salad, try adding a can of chickpeas into the mix.
  • Tabouli with Feta: If you are not following a vegan diet, you can add a cup of feta. It adds a nice creamy and salty deliciousness and elevates the flavors to a whole new level.
  • Add a tablespoon of pomegranate molasses into the dressing: If you cook Mediterranean / Middle Eastern recipes on a regular basis, you might keep pomegranate molasses in your fridge. If so, add a tablespoon of it to the salad for additional sweet and savory goodness.

A Few Last Minute Tips for The Best Tabbouleh Recipe

  • Can I make quinoa tabbouleh in advance? You certainly can make this salad a day in advance. If you do so, be sure to keep the salad in an airtight container in the fridge. Some people chop everything up, mix it with cooked quinoa, and drizzle it with the dressing at the very last minute, but I prefer adding the dressing in as I assemble the salad. I find that the time spent marinating in the fridge yields a more flavorful salad.
  • What to do with the leftovers? If you have any leftovers, you can place them in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge up to 2 days. This quinoa tabbouleh salad makes the most amazing lunch on the next day.
  • Make it with bulgur instead: If you have some on hand, you can swap quinoa with bulgur wheat. Be sure to check out my detailed post on How To Cook Bulgur Wheat if you need help with cooking it.

Whether you want to take a virtual culinary tour the Mediterranean or wondering how to make quinoa taste good, you should give this recipe a try. It is one that will surely not disappoint.

Other Quinoa Recipes You Might Like:

Similar Fresh Salad Recipes You Might Like:

Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe Image
Print

Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
Course Salad
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 303kcal

Ingredients

To cook the Quinoa:

  • 1 cup quinoa rinsed
  • 1 ¾ cups water
  • ½ teaspoon salt

For The Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
  • 1/4 cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Tabbouleh:

  • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 cup fresh dill chopped
  • ½ cup fresh mint chopped
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes chopped
  • 2 small or 1 English cucumbers, peeled and chopped
  • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

Instructions

  • To cook the quinoa: Place quinoa in a saucepan and add in the water and salt. Give it a mix, put the lid on and bring it to a boil in medium high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn down the heat to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Take it off the heat and let it rest for 15 minutes. Fluff it with a fork and place it in a large salad bowl.
  • Make the salad dressing: Meanwhile, prep the dressing by whisking all dressing ingredients in a small bowl. Set it aside.
  • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh: Place all tabbouleh ingredients in the bowl with the cooked quinoa.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a toss.
  • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Can I make quinoa tabbouleh in advance? You certainly can make this salad a day in advance. If you do so, be sure to keep the salad in an airtight container in the fridge. Some people chop everything up, mix it with cooked quinoa, and drizzle it with the dressing at the very last minute, but I prefer adding the dressing in as I assemble the salad. I find that the time spent marinating in the fridge yields a more flavorful salad.
  • What to do with the leftovers? If you have any leftovers, you can place them in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge up to 2 days. This quinoa tabbouleh salad makes the most amazing lunch on the next day.

Nutrition

Calories: 303kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 903mg | Potassium: 563mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 2681IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 92mg | Iron: 4mg

This recipe has been updated in July 2020 with minimal edits with no changes to the originally published recipe – It was first published in September 2018.

The post Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
Mediterranean Quinoa Salad Recipe (Ready in 30 Min!) https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-quinoa-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-quinoa-salad/#comments Thu, 02 Apr 2020 21:11:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=28187 Meal-worthy quinoa salads are popular for a reason. They are easy and quick to make and with a powerhouse ingredient like quinoa, they are good for you too. Today’s recipe, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, is packed with other superfoods like tomatoes, olives, parsley, and more. As I was creating this recipe, I took some inspiration from my Southwestern Quinoa Salad, Kale Quinoa Salad, Quinoa Lentil and Feta Salad, and Quinoa Squash...

The post Mediterranean Quinoa Salad Recipe (Ready in 30 Min!) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Meal-worthy quinoa salads are popular for a reason. They are easy and quick to make and with a powerhouse ingredient like quinoa, they are good for you too. Today’s recipe, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, is packed with other superfoods like tomatoes, olives, parsley, and more.

As I was creating this recipe, I took some inspiration from my Southwestern Quinoa Salad, Kale Quinoa Salad, Quinoa Lentil and Feta Salad, and Quinoa Squash Salad but incorporated a modern, Mediterranean twist (much like my Quinoa Tabouli).

Fan of quinoa? Be sure to check out all our Quinoa Recipes.

A bowl of Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with Chickpeas

Since quinoa is fluffy and delicate, it is better at absorbing looser vinaigrettes rather than creamy dressings. That’s why I decided to drizzle it with my homemade Lemon Vinaigrette.

This Mediterranean Quinoa Salad may be fresh and light, but it will certainly fill you up with good-for-you ingredients. Enjoy cold for lunch or serve it to all your friends during the warmer months as a wonderfully healthy side dish. It just so happens to be Gluten-Free and Vegetarian, too!

Ingredients

This easy Mediterranean quinoa bowl is made with a simple lemon vinaigrette, quinoa, cherry tomatoes, Persian cucumbers, Kalamata olives, chickpeas, red onion, Feta cheese, and Italian parsley (or arugula).

All ingredients for the recipe are laid out on the counter
  • Cooked Quinoa: It is no secret quinoa is a great protein with a number of benefits for those of us following a wholesome diet. You can cook quinoa on the stove, in microwave, in a rice cooker or in a pressure cooker. I bacth cook some every week, divide it into portions and freeze them in small portions to use throughout the week.
    For this recipe, white, red, or tricolor would all work.
  • Kalamata Olives: Known as ‘Greek black olives,’ Kalamata olives are deep-purple, plump and oblong. These were the olives I grew up eating and those you will find in many Greek and Mediterranean recipes. You can typically find them at the Olive Bar in large grocery stores or in the same aisle as jarred olives. Purchase the pitted variety for easy chopping.
  • Italian Parsley: Make sure to purchase flat-leaf parsley, since curly parsley does not have much flavor, and always look for bright, vibrant, crisp leaves.
  • Arugula: Arugula can be considered a ‘fancy’ ingredient that many people think is more expensive than other greens. But I find it to be just as economical when purchased in moderation. I love baby arugula for its tender leaves and milder, peppery bite, which you can find year-round in the packaged greens section of most grocery stores.

How To Make It?

This cold Quinoa Cucumber Feta salad recipe has all the qualities of a Greek Salad with a plant-based twist! Simply:

Step by step photos on how to make quinoa salad with feta
  1. Make the vinaigrette. In a small mason jar, combine the olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper. Shake vigorously for 30 seconds to emulsify.
  2. Dress the quinoa. Place the cooked quinoa (preferably warm – see PRO TIP below) in a large bowl and drizzle half of the lemon dressing on top. Stir to combine.
  3. Add the prepared vegetables. Add the cherry tomatoes, Persian cucumbers, Kalamata olives, chickpeas, and red onion. Toss together with the remaining dressing.
  4. Finish with Feta and greens! Add in the crumbled feta cheese and Italian parsley or arugula. Give it a gentle toss (so as not to wilt the greens), taste for seasoning and add, if necessary. Serve warm, room temperature or cold.

PRO TIP: Pouring the dressing over the quinoa while it is still warm ensures the quinoa absorbs more flavor. The tiny grains act as a sponge to soak up that wonderful citrus dressing!

Can I Make This Salad In Advance?

Yes and no.

If you are prepping this vegetable quinoa salad for lunch, then yes, I would simply follow the recipe as written and store it in the fridge for a few days.

However, if you are planning to serve to a crowd, feel free to cook the quinoa one day in advance and drizzle it with half of the lemon vinaigrette recipe while it is still warm (as noted above). I would then store the dressed quinoa, remaining dressing and all other ingredients in separate containers in the fridge.

When ready to serve, add all the ingredients in a large bowl and gently toss to combine.

How To Store?

This quinoa salad will keep best for up to 2 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

I love prepping it the night before. It makes a wonderful cold grain salad my husband and I enjoy as a light lunch during the week.

What Dishes Go Well With This Salad?

Since this recipe is packed with protein, carbs and fat, I often enjoy it as a complete meal for lunch. But for those nights when I want a hearty, full-flavored meal, I serve this simple quinoa salad as a side dish to some of my favorite meat dishes such as:

  • Whole Roasted Chicken with Potatoes: I cannot imagine a better salad recipe to serve this simple roasted chicken recipe.
  • Mediterranean Lemon Chicken: If you want to make the theme of your meal fully Mediterranean, serve this salad with this weeknight lemon chicken.
  • Turkish Meatballs: I usually make a batch of these meatballs and serve them with this salad. This combo is also a great meal prep option.

Calories:

One serving of this quinoa bowl is only 378 calories. You can find more information on the nutritional values of this salad in the recipe card below.

It’s Gluten-Free, Vegetarian and packed with a generous amount of vegetables and plant-based protein to keep me satisfied until dinner.

A bowl of Greek Quinoa Salad served wit lemon vinaigrette on the side

Variations

With a few easy ingredient swaps, you can make this Mediterranean-diet quinoa salad your own!

  • Black Olives: Use pitted black olives instead of Kalamata. If you’re really adventurous, try oil-cured black olives (found at the Olive Bar). These are dense, rich, meaty black olives with a pungent and briny bite.
  • Herbs: Substitute half or all of the Italian parsley with any Mediterranean soft herb, such as mint or basil.
  • Alternative Leafy Greens: If you can’t find arugula or simply don’t like it, use an equal amount of baby spinach or baby kale. If you use regular kale, slice into thin strips and massage the sliced leaves with a tablespoon of lemon vinaigrette for 1-2 minutes before adding to the salad. This helps tenderize the sturdy leaves.
  • Add in a small cubed avocado: Similar to the way I did in my Quinoa Salad with Avocado, you can always add in a small cubed avocado to make it more delicious.
  • Roasted Red Peppers: Drain and chop a small jar of roasted red bell peppers and add to the salad mix along with the remaining vegetables.
  • Goat Cheese: Replace the feta with an equal amount of crumbled goat cheese (either plain or garlic & herb). Tip – the goat cheese goes particularly well with the above mentioned roasted peppers.
  • Following a vegan diet? Simply omit the Feta cheese for a vegan Greek Quinoa Salad.

A Few Helpful Tips

  • This quinoa vegetable salad is completely versatile! If there’s any ingredient in this recipe you’re not a fan of, simply omit it altogether.
  • Serve warm, room temperature or cold. Feel free to enjoy this quinoa salad freshly-made, after a few hours at room temperature or cold from the fridge over the next few days. Just note if you are going to eat it as a cold salad, remove from the fridge 5 minutes beforehand to take some of the chill off.
  • Bring it to potlucks, picnics, and BBQs! This makes a wonderful addition to all your spring and summer parties since the ingredients hold up so well to time and temperature. Trust me – your friends will thank you!

It is no secret quinoa is a great source of protein with a ton of benefits for those of us following a wholesome diet. This simple salad is just one of the many ways to incorporate it into your diet. I hope you’ll give it a try and enjoy it as much as we do.

If you try this Mediterranean Quinoa Salad recipe or any other quinoa recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with lemon vinaigrette on the side
Print

Mediterranean Quinoa Salad Recipe

A 30-minute Mediterranean Quinoa Salad recipe that you can make for lunch or as a side dish for any of your meat dishes. Made with tomatoes, chickpeas, olives, and parsley this easy Greek salad is guaranteed to impress.
Course Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 30 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 378kcal

Ingredients

For The Lemon Vinaigrette:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 small clove of garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa – white, red, tricolor quinoa would all work
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into small cubes
  • ¾ cup Kalamata olives roughly chopped
  • 1 can 15 oz. can of chickpeas, drained
  • ½ red onion about ½ cups, chopped
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (optional)
  • 1 cup Italian Parsley or 2 cups fresh arugula, washed and rinsed

Instructions

  • Make the vinaigrette. In a small mason jar, combine the olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper. Shake vigorously for 30 seconds to emulsify.
  • Dress the quinoa. Place the cooked quinoa in a large bowl and drizzle half of the lemon dressing on top. Stir to combine.
  • Add the prepared vegetables. Add the cherry tomatoes, cucumbers, Kalamata olives, chickpeas, and red onion. Toss together with the remaining dressing.
  • Finish with Feta and greens: Add in the crumbled feta cheese and Italian parsley (or arugula). Give it a gentle toss (so as not to wilt the greens), taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Serve warm, cold, or at room temperature.

Video

Notes

  • How To Store: This quinoa salad will keep best for up to 2 days in an airtight container in the fridge.
VARIATIONS:
With a few easy ingredient swaps, you can make this quinoa salad your own:
  • Black Olives: Use pitted black olives instead of Kalamata. If you’re really adventurous, try oil-cured black olives (found at the Olive Bar). These are dense, rich, meaty black olives with a pungent and briny bite.
  • Herbs: Substitute half or all of the Italian parsley with any Mediterranean soft herb, such as mint or basil.
  • Alternative Leafy Greens: If you can’t find arugula or simply don’t like it, use an equal amount of baby spinach or baby kale. If you use regular kale, slice into thin strips and massage the sliced leaves with a tablespoon of lemon vinaigrette for 1-2 minutes before adding to the salad. This helps tenderize the sturdy leaves.
  • Roasted Red Peppers: Drain and chop a small jar of roasted red bell peppers and add to the salad mix along with the remaining vegetables.
  • Goat Cheese: Replace the feta with an equal amount of crumbled goat cheese (either plain or garlic & herb). Tip – the goat cheese goes particularly well with the above mentioned roasted peppers.
  • Following a vegan diet? Simply omit the Feta cheese for a vegan Greek Quinoa Salad.

Nutrition

Calories: 378kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1239mg | Potassium: 661mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1671IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 201mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Mediterranean Quinoa Salad Recipe (Ready in 30 Min!) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-quinoa-salad/feed/ 10
How to Make Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Sat, 14 Mar 2020 09:02:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 If you have ever been to any country around the Mediterranean and Middle East Regions, you know that plain yogurt is a staple for every household. Growing up in Turkey with a mom cooking Turkish recipes all the time, we were no different. My mother would serve every dish with either plain whole milk yogurt, her go-to Yogurt Dressing, or this easy-to-make tzatziki sauce recipe.  Well, the name was different...

The post How to Make Tzatziki Sauce Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever been to any country around the Mediterranean and Middle East Regions, you know that plain yogurt is a staple for every household. Growing up in Turkey with a mom cooking Turkish recipes all the time, we were no different. My mother would serve every dish with either plain whole milk yogurt, her go-to Yogurt Dressing, or this easy-to-make tzatziki sauce recipe. 

Well, the name was different (it is called cacik in Turkish), but the concept was the same. It’s a beautiful green and white sauce for falafel, gyro, grilled meats, or grilled vegetables. It’s also kind of like the dip version of my Creamy Cucumber Salad.

Authentic Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is served with colorful fresh vegetables.

In our last cookbook club gathering, one of the ladies said that she has never tried garlicky yogurt in her life and would love to know how to make it. Realizing that not everyone grew up eating this Mediterranean white yogurt sauce, I decided that I needed to go back to my roots and share more recipes made with this magical dressing/sauce.

While I am publishing this recipe as a preparation for this Chicken Pita Wraps recipe, I still serve it regularly. Whether you serve it as a salad dressing, white sauce for your gyro, dip for a cheese platter, or sauce for a sandwich, this Greek tzatziki sauce is my go-to condiment.

What is Tzatziki Sauce?

Tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip, spread, or sauce popular in the Mediterranean and Middle East. Referred to by many names such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, in my family, we put it on just about anything – from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled vegetables. I like to refer to it as the Turkish version of Ketchup!

A woman is photographed from the top view as she is serving tzatziki sauce with pita bread.

Ingredient List / What Is In It?

An authentic Tzatziki sauce recipe requires a few simple ingredients. You will need:

All of the ingredients for this recipe are laid out with their names written on them
  • Fresh Cucumber – It is best to get a Persian or English cucumber versus a regular cucumber because of its thinner skins and smaller seeds. This way, you can peel and grate the whole cucumber without having to remove the seeds! Regular cucumbers tend to have skins that are too thick and waxy, while the seeds are just too big and bitter.
  • Whole Milk, Plain Greek Yogurt – A whole milk, plain Greek yogurt will give you a rich and creamy tzatziki dip that is totally worth the extra fat. You can, of course, use a low-fat or fat-free version, but note that if you use anything other than a full-fat Greek yogurt the dip will not be as creamy.
  • Fresh Lemon Juice – Freshly squeezed lemon juice brightens up this Greek white sauce. White wine vinegar works as a good substitute if that is all you have on hand.
All ingredients are placed in a large bowl as a woman is getting ready to mix it
  • Garlic – This cucumber yogurt sauce includes raw garlic cloves, so use the freshest garlic you can. Mince to the finest texture.
  • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper – Season according to the recipe, then taste and adjust to your liking at the very end.
  • Fresh Dill – I simply adore fresh dill. It’s an herb I grew up with in Turkey since we use it in just about anything. But I find it is not as popular here in America. If you can’t find fresh dill or don’t enjoy the flavor, you can use an equal amount of other fresh herbs such as fresh mint or parsley.

What Kind Of Yogurt Should I Use For This Greek Cucumber Sauce

It may sound basic, but the type of yogurt you use for this Mediterranean sauce actually makes all the difference. Traditional tzatziki is actually made with sheep or goat’s milk yogurt that has been strained, but it’s hard to find those here.

I like plain full-fat Greek yogurt, such as Stonyfield Greek Yogurt (my favorite yogurt brand.) The Greek yogurt sold here is already strained, which is why it is thicker and higher in protein than regular yogurt.

How To Make It?

This Greek sauce with yogurt and cucumbers can be mixed together in a few easy steps. Simply:

Shredded cucumber placed in a mesh sieve and is being drained by a woman
  1. Shred the cucumber. Using the large holes on your box grater, grate the entire peeled cucumber and transfer to a strainer, pressing down with a spatula to strain out all the excess liquid.
A woman is mixing Mediterranean yogurt sauce with dill
Yogurt with cucumber, garlic, and dill is being mixed by a woman
  1. Whisk the yogurt and seasonings. In a large bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper.
  2. Fold in the cucumber and dill. Use a spatula to fold the cucumber and dill into the thick yogurt mixture. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for a few hours. Transfer to a serving bowl and enjoy as a dip, spread, or sauce!

How To Make It Thicker

Although Greek yogurt is thicker than regular yogurt, you can strain it for an even thicker sauce or dip. To do so, simply place a few layers of cheesecloth (or a few layers of paper towels) in a fine-mesh strainer set over a bowl, add the Greek yogurt, cover with the ends of the cheesecloth, and set in your fridge. Allow it to strain for at least 1 hour and up to overnight.

Note that the longer you allow the Greek yogurt to strain, the thicker it will become.

Straining the cucumber prior to mixing it into the yogurt sauce also produces thicker tzatziki.

What To Do With It?

The uses for this tzatziki sauce recipe are truly limitless. Most of the time, I make this for my husband and me to enjoy as a dip with fresh sliced vegetables and crudite throughout the week. But for more interesting and fun uses, you could try this tzatziki sauce recipe as:

  • Sauce for Gyros, Falafel, Grilled meat or Veggies – simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, or serve it with Turkish Kofte.
  • Tzatziki as Salad Dressing – thin it out with a few tablespoons of water and toss in your favorite greens!
  • Party Dip – slice a wide array of fresh vegetables such as celery, carrots, radish, and broccoli, add some pita chips and soft pita bread to the platter, and serve it as a healthy dip at your next party.
  • Mediterranean Appetizer Spread (aka Meze Platter) – serve it in a bowl on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, toasted pita bread, and fresh raw vegetables.
A bowl of Turkish cacik is served with fresh vegetables

How to Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this Greek Yogurt Sauce is that you can make easily make it a part of your weekly meal prep. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 3 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. After a few days when you first open the lid, you might see some excess water on top. That is normal. Just drain it and give it a good stir before serving.

Nutrition Facts

Tzatziki sauce is not only delicious, but it is nutritious, too! This recipe makes 1 1/2 cup of tzatziki dip that is ideal for 4 servings. Each serving is 112 calories.

Please refer to the nutritional information in the recipe card for more information.

Variations

Want to switch things up and make it your own? Well, a homemade tzatziki sauce recipe can be made in a variety of ways. Here are a few ideas you could try:

  • Without Dill: If you’re not a fan of dill, simply omit the herb entirely or substitute flat-leaf parsley.
  • Without Garlic: Raw garlic can be too strong of a flavor for some. Feel free to reduce the garlic to 1 clove or leave it out altogether.
  • With Mint: Mint would be a wonderful addition. You could either replace the dill or add an equal amount of fresh mint to this Greek dipping sauce.
  • No Cucumber: Although I feel cucumber makes a traditional tzatziki sauce, you can omit it. A great alternative would be this Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing. You can also try to up the flavor profile by making a Yogurt Tahini Sauce or Yogurt Dill Sauce to enhance those Mediterranean flavors.
  • Low-Fat: As mentioned earlier, you can make this cucumber yogurt sauce with low-fat or fat-free yogurt. If you do decide to make it low-fat, I would recommend straining the yogurt to get a thicker consistency.
  • With Sour Cream: I have never tried making this sauce with sour cream, but this is a question I get from a lot of readers. My recommendation would be to replace ½ cup of Greek yogurt with full-fat sour cream. If you try it out, let me know how it goes!
  • Dairy-Free/Vegan: If you are not including dairy in your diet, but still want a healthy and flavorful sauce recipe, try substituting the yogurt with Green Cashew Sauce and add a few splashes of water to thin it out, if necessary.
  • Make it a “Soup”: Add in a ripe avocado and turn it into Cold Cucumber Soup. Topped off with roasted shrimp, this is a modern way to turn tzatziki into an elegant appetizer/starter during the summer months.

Expert Tips

Here are a few expert tips to help you make the best tzatziki recipe in your own kitchen:

  • Grate and drain cucumber: I know it is easier to put everything in a bowl and mix it. However, draining the grated cucumber is an important step to remove excess moisture and prevent a soggy tzatziki. So, do not skip that part.
  • Fresh herbs for the best flavors: While this recipe can be made with dried herbs, if you are after the most authentic tzatziki sauce, use fresh herbs and chop them right before adding them in.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste test right before serving to ensure that it is properly seasoned according to your taste buds.
  • Chill before serving: This Greek tzatziki sauce is best when served cold. Let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. Doing so will allow the flavors to meld and help you achieve the best flavor profile.
  • Extra Virgin Olive oil: While this recipe doesn’t use olive oil as an ingredient, you can drizzle it with it at the end. I love the combination of garlic, olive oil, and yogurt and think that it is a good way of garnishing as well.

FAQs:

After I decided to share this recipe, I did a quick Google research, which revealed a few commonly asked questions that most people have about making tzatziki sauce at home. Below are those questions and my answers:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/.
The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically you can freeze yogurt, but after it is thawed it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

How long is Tzatziki sauce good for?

It is usually good for 2 days. However, on the second day, it will be runnier. While I recommend whipping up a fresh one, you can add a little more yogurt to salvage on the second day.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. Obviously, the higher the fat content the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

Yes and no. Again, it is a personal preference. I personally don’t like the bitter taste of the skin of the cucumber, but if you do feel free to omit that step.

Other healthy salad dressings you might like:

Here are a few more homemade sauces you might enjoy:

If you try this Easy Tzatziki Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A Bowl of Tzatziki is served with pita bread and photographed from the top view.
Print

Easy to Make Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

Learn this easy to make Tzatziki Sauce recipe as I share my tips and techniques in an easy to follow recipe with a quick how-to video.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings 1 1/2 cups
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Plain Greek Yogurt*
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves of garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspooon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill

Instructions

  • Using a shredder, shred the cucumber. Transfer it into a strainer and strain all of its juices pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
  • In a mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 3 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How to Make Tzatziki Sauce Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 21
The Best Muhammara Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Fri, 10 Jan 2020 18:46:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! It was a vegetable dip I grew up eating. We literally put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter. If you’ve never heard of this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to...

The post The Best Muhammara Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! It was a vegetable dip I grew up eating. We literally put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

If you’ve never heard of this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in both color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

If you are a fan of Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip (a recipe similar to baba ganoush), Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes as well.

Key Ingredients

To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
  • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted, however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar and the texture is softer.
  • Raw Walnuts – Toasting the walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts at the ready any time I need them!
  • Crackers – The traditional muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
  • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
  • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are not familiar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to the way balsamic glaze is prepared). It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Nowadays most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
  • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
  • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip. It complements the fire-roasted red peppers so well.
  • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
  • Cayenne Pepper – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it.
    Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo red pepper flakes.

How to make roasted red pepper dip

To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

Red peppers are roasted and charred
  1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
  2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
  3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
  1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
  2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

  • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with more crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables.
  • Spread: Slather it on sandwich bread, fresh pita bread, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara make the best sandwich spread.
  • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
  • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!

Expert Tips:

  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also if you can handle the heat be sure to sprinkle it with aleppo chili flakes.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

FAQs

What is Muhammara?

Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.
Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes that’s very widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

How do you pronounce Muhammara?

Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

How Many Calories?

This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
Print

Muhammara Recipe

Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings (1 1/2 cups)
Calories 176kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium-sized red bell peppers
  • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used
  • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
  • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
  • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
  • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
  • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
  • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
  • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
  • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

Video

Notes

  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

The post The Best Muhammara Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 14
Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-salad-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-salad-dressing/#comments Tue, 25 Jun 2019 12:29:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=24936 This post is sponsored by Stonyfield Organic. As always, all opinions are my own. Ever since I came back from my trip to Stowe with Stonyfield Organic, I have been making a lot of plain yogurt-based salad dressings, dips, and sauces. While this Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing is a current favorite, you can find a plethora of other Greek yogurt recipes in our archives, each offering a unique twist and...

The post Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This post is sponsored by Stonyfield Organic. As always, all opinions are my own.

Ever since I came back from my trip to Stowe with Stonyfield Organic, I have been making a lot of plain yogurt-based salad dressings, dips, and sauces. While this Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing is a current favorite, you can find a plethora of other Greek yogurt recipes in our archives, each offering a unique twist and flavor profile.

While I love fruity yogurt mixes, my true love is plain whole-milk Greek yogurt. I prefer plain yogurt as it allows me to use it as a blank slate to create dips, dressings, and spreads such as my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, White Gyro Sauce, Creamy Yogurt Dill Sauce, and Greek Yogurt Ranch Dressing.

What is in a Greek Yogurt Dressing Recipe?

Making this easy Greek yogurt dressing requires nothing more than what is already in a well-stocked pantry. Below, you will find the essential ingredients you’ll need, along with versatile substitutions and optional add-ins to ensure that this creamy yogurt dressing recipe meets your needs.

Ingredients for Greek yogurt dressing recipe from the top view.
  • Plain Greek yogurt (aka strained yogurt): When it comes to yogurt, I am a big fan of Stonyfield Organic’s Greek yogurt as it is nice and thick and super high quality. However, you can make this Mediterranean yogurt dressing recipe with plain yogurt as well. If you are calorie-conscious and prefer the low-fat or low-calorie version of this dressing, feel free to swap whole milk yogurt with fat-free plain yogurt.
  • Fresh garlic: You will need two garlic cloves that are either minced or pressed through a garlic press. Alternatively, for a lighter garlic flavor, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder in place of fresh garlic.
  • Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice if you can, as it will deliver the best-tasting yogurt salad dressing.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Olive oil is a key ingredient in providing a rich flavor and ensuring a creamy texture in this yogurt dressing recipe. 
  • Fresh dill: Fresh chopped dill is a classic ingredient in many Mediterranean salad dressings (hello, Tzatziki), and this creamy dressing is no exception. If you are not a fan of fresh dill, you can use dried dill. However, please be aware that the dried version has a very mild flavor compared to its fresh version.
  • Seasonings: You will need the good old salt and pepper. I prefer kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. However, you can use table salt and white pepper as well. 

Substitutions and Optional Add-ins

  • Vinegar: To turn this into a Greek yogurt vinaigrette, use an equal amount of apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar in place of lemon juice.
  • Yogurt: While I make this recipe with Greek yogurt, regular plain yogurt can also be a suitable choice. However, be aware that it will result in a thinner consistency, but the overall flavor will still be great.
  • Fresh Herbs: Not a fan of dill? Use fresh parsley, fresh chives, or fresh mint instead.
  • Dijon Mustard: While it is not traditional, adding a teaspoon of Dijon mustard would add some depth and complexity to the dressing, lending a richer and creamier texture.
  • Sweetener: Some version of this homemade yogurt dressing uses a small amount of sweetener, mostly to balance out the tanginess of Greek yogurt. If you prefer your dressing to have a sweet and savory flavor contrast, you can add in a small amount of (1 teaspoon or less)  maple syrup, agave nectar, or honey. 
  • Optional seasonings and spices: While the basic garlic lemon yogurt dressing is versatile on its own, you can tailor it to complement the dish you are pairing it with by incorporating seasonings and spices like ground cumin, onion powder, cayenne pepper, and red pepper flakes.

How to Make Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing Recipe?

Making this healthy and creamy salad dressing cannot be easier. Simply:

Person showing how to make creamy Greek dressing in a collage of images.
  1. Prepare ingredients: Place Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Stir to combine.
  2. Add in the oil: As you continuously whisk, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and mix until the mixture is thoroughly emulsified. If you prefer it to be thinner, you can whisk in a few tablespoons of water.
  3. Stir in the herbs: If using, add the dill (or any other fresh herbs you are using) and whisk until combined.

And voila, just like that, you have yourself a delicious, healthy, creamy, and homemade dressing that you can use pretty much on anything.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

My favorite thing about this creamy yogurt dressing is that it gets better as it sits, so it is great for meal prep or if you want to make it ahead of time. Here is how I do it:

  • Make ahead: Make a batch, place it in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid, and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Be sure to give it a vigorous shake before using it.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store the remaining yogurt sauce in a jar (or an airtight container), put the lid on, and place it in the fridge. It should be fresh for up to 5 days. If it begins to separate or appear watery as it sits, simply give it a good shake or blend in a few tablespoons of plain yogurt to restore its creamy consistency.

How To Use This Dressing In Your Daily Cooking? 

Growing up in Turkey, this was my mom’s go-to creamy salad dressing. The good news is that while it is referred to as a “salad dressing,” it can be used as a sauce as well. It is wonderful when served with grain bowls, sandwiches, and wraps. Need more ideas? Here are a few other ways to put it to good use:

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for this dressing is pretty straightforward, making the best creamy Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing involves some culinary intuition. Here are a few expert tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Taste as you go: It is best to give it a taste to ensure that the seasoning is to your liking and it is properly seasoned for the dish you are pairing it with.
  • Adjust the consistency: Should you prefer a more pourable consistency, feel free to add a splash of water to achieve the desired texture. Conversely, if it is too thick, you can thicken it by adding more Greek yogurt.
  • Experiment with flavors: Use this dressing as a place to start, but feel free to try it with different spices and fresh or dried herbs to tailor it perfectly to the dish you are accompanying.
  • Blend well: When incorporating olive oil into dressings (as we do here), it is important to whisk or blend it in slowly to create a creamy, emulsified texture. Doing so prevents the dressing from separating. The good news is that you can easily whisk it by hand, but if you are making a large amount (perhaps if you are making it for a crowd), you can use a food processor or a blender to whip it up.
  • Let it rest: Keep in mind that this healthy creamy salad dressing gets better as it sits. While you can enjoy it right away, letting it rest in the fridge for a few hours gives the ingredients time to meld and the flavors to marinate, resulting in a dressing that is more robust in taste.
  • Use it as a marinade: Got some leftovers? Similar to my Yogurt Marinated Chicken Thighs recipe, this sauce makes an excellent marinade for chicken thighs or chicken breasts.
Yogurt sauce for salad in a bowl with a whisk.

FAQs

What Kind Of Yogurt Works Best For This Recipe?

Plain, unsweetened whole milk Greek yogurt would be the best option. However, if you are after fewer calories, you can use low or non-fat, plain, unsweetened yogurt. You can also use plain instead of Greek yogurt.

What Can I Use Instead Of Dill?

You can use any fresh herbs you have on hand. Fresh parsley, chives, basil, and mint would all work.

Is yogurt salad dressing good for you?

Yes, it is. According to Healthline, plain unsweetened Greek yogurt is a good source of protein, supports gut and bone health, and helps with muscle recovery and healthy body composition. Since the main ingredient in this Greek dressing is plain unsweetened yogurt, it can be considered healthy.

What can I use to thin out Greek yogurt?

You can use water to thin out Greek yogurt.

Can I Use Sour Cream Instead Of Greek Yogurt?

I would not recommend substituting sour cream in place of Greek Yogurt in this recipe.

Other Homemade Salad Dressings You Might Like:

If you try this Greek yogurt dressing recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing Recipe Image
Print

Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing Recipe

This healthy Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing recipe is creamy, flavorful, easy to make, and tastes better than any store bought dressing. Ready in 5 minutes, it is delicious when drizzled on salads, roasted vegetables, and even on grilled meat.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 394kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Plain Whole Milk Greek Yogurt
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper or white pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ¼ cup fresh dill* chopped or (1 teaspoon dried dill), optional
  • 2 tablespoons water optional

Instructions

  • Whisk together Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a mixing bowl.
  • While whisking constantly, drizzle in the olive oil and mix until the mixture is thoroughly emulsified.
  • If it is too thick to your liking, you can use a few tablespoons of water to thin it out.
  • Mix in the fresh dill, if using.
  • Drizzle onto your favorite salads, roasted vegetables, grain bowls, sandwiches, and more.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields one cup of Greek yogurt dressing. The nutritional values below are for the whole dressing.
  • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using plain full fat Greek yogurt, if you want, you can use plain yogurt or low-fat or non-fat yogurt (for fewer calories) as well. These substitutions would make it less creamy, but it would still taste good.
  • Fresh Herbs: Not a fan of dill? Use fresh parsley, basil, chives or mint instead. Or, you can omit using herbs altogether.
  • Dijon Mustard – Optional: While it is not traditional, you can whisk in a teaspoon of Dijon mustard to add some depth and complexity to the dressing and a richer and creamier texture.
  • Sweetener – Optional: If you prefer your dressing to have a sweet and savory flavor contrast, you can add in a small amount of (1 teaspoon or less)  maple syrup, agave nectar, or honey. 
  • Make ahead: Make a batch, place it in a mason jar, cover it with the lid, and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Be sure to shake before using.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store the remaining yogurt sauce in a jar (or an airtight container), put the lid on, and place it in the fridge. It should be fresh for up to 5 days. If it begins to separate or appear watery as it sits, simply give it a good shake or blend in a few tablespoons of plain yogurt to restore its creamy consistency.

Nutrition

Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 2407mg | Potassium: 431mg | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 907IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 255mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Greek Yogurt Salad Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-salad-dressing/feed/ 51
How to Make Turkish Coffee https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-turkish-coffee/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-turkish-coffee/#comments Sun, 17 Mar 2019 14:53:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2775 My love of coffee comes from my mother. For her, having Turkish coffee was almost a daily ritual that had to be done with friends and family. More than anything, it was a way to celebrate her friendships and show gratitude to the ones she loved. Though she worked most of her life, on those rare days when she was home, she would invite her friends over for coffee in...

The post How to Make Turkish Coffee appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
My love of coffee comes from my mother.

For her, having Turkish coffee was almost a daily ritual that had to be done with friends and family. More than anything, it was a way to celebrate her friendships and show gratitude to the ones she loved.

A cup of freshly cooked turkish coffee is photographed from the front view.

Though she worked most of her life, on those rare days when she was home, she would invite her friends over for coffee in the morning. Prior to their arrival, she would make me set up two trays: the first one with Turkish coffee cups and the second one with water glasses. We would always have something sweet to serve the coffee with. Although Turkish delights are more traditional, my mother loved serving hers with chocolate.

When her friends would arrive, it was my job to make and serve the coffee. After welcoming them, I would ask how they take their coffee and then immediately go to the kitchen to make it to their liking. It was such a proud moment for my mother when I would come out of the kitchen with the tray in my hand.

When I look back and think about it today, I realize how important it was for her that I understood the tradition behind it. I was very fortunate that I was allowed to drink coffee at a young age and learn to enjoy it through the family tradition.

A woman is photographed from the front view as she is serving coffee

In Turkey, when you go to somebody’s house, the first question isn’t if you want to drink Turkish coffee, but rather how you would like to have your coffee prepared. By how, your host is asking about the amount of sugar you would like to have in your coffee. To answer the question, you may say “sade” which means no sugar; “az seker” which means very little sugar; “orta”  which means with 1-2 teaspoons of sugar; or “sekerli”  which means with 3-4 teaspoon sugar.

Once you place your request, it is the responsibility of the person making the coffee to prepare it according to everyone’s individual sugar preferences. Usually, that person is the youngest girl of the house. As you can imagine, as the only daughter of our household, I’ve made more than my fair share of coffee in my lifetime. Therefore, I feel qualified enough to share my knowledge with you.

Turkish Coffee is being poured into the cup photographed from the front view

Ingredients You Need:

Ingredients to make Turkish coffee are photographed from the top view

You will need:

  • Cold filtered water
  • Turkish coffee: Turkish coffee is much more finely ground than regular coffee. Even though you can grind it yourself, nowadays you can find it in most Middle Eastern or Mediterranean supermarkets. My favorite brand is Kurukahveci Mehmet Efendi (affiliate link).
  • Cezve (a special wide-bottomed pot, usually made of copper) I have one similar to this Copper Turkish Coffee Pot (affiliate link) and have been using it for years.
  • Turkish coffee cups: Here is a set (affiliate link) you can purchase
  • Granulated sugar

How to Make Turkish Coffee

Making Turkish coffee is easy and requires no special skills, so long as you know a couple of tricks.

Here is how in a nutshell:

A woman is pouring water into the cup to measure
A woman is pouring water into cezve
  • Water: Always use cold, filtered water. To measure the amount of water for each cup, use the coffee cup you are going to use.
    When it comes to the water to Turkish coffee proportions my rule of thumb is 1½ “cup” of water per cup. Once again, the “cup” measurement is the coffee cup that you are going to serve the coffee in, rather than a standard measuring cup.
A woman is placing coffee into the  pot - aka cezve
A woman is placing sugar into cezve
  • Coffee & Sugar: For each cup of coffee, use a heaping tablespoon of ground coffee. If preparing a cup with sugar, add it in the very beginning, stirring the mixture until combined. However, if one or more of the guests prefer no sugar, prepare and pour that cup first. After returning the coffee pot to the stove, add in more sugar to suit the preferences of the remaining guests.
A woman is photographed from the front view as she is mixing ingredients
A woman is photographed from the front view as she is serving a coffee

How To Cook Turkish Coffee

Slowly bring the mixture to a boil over medium heat. This will take 3-4 minutes, so keep a close eye on it. As the coffee warms, a dark foam will build.

A pot of of coffee is cooking on the stovetop highlighting the thick foam
A woman is pouring freshly cooked Turkish coffee from cezve

It is customary and important to serve Turkish coffee with foam on top. When the mixture is close to a boil, use a teaspoon to transfer some of the foam into each coffee cup. Return the coffee pot to the stovetop.

As coffee comes to a boil, pour half of the coffee into the cups, over the foam. Return coffee pot to stovetop and boil the remaining coffee for an additional 10-15 seconds and fill the cups to the rim.

How To Serve:

A woman is serving two cups of coffee on a tray

To serve:

  • We always serve Turkish coffee with cold (or room temperature) water, because a sip of water will allow the person to clear his/her palate before drinking coffee for the best enjoyment. In addition to water, most people like to serve it with a small sweet treat like Turkish delights, chocolate, candy, etc.
  • When serving it is important to start with the eldest guest in the room. It is a sign of respect to acknowledge their age and considered disrespectful not to do so.
  • Since this type of coffee is much denser than filtered coffee, it is not customary to drink more than one cup. I have read on some websites that some people add milk or cream to their coffee, but to be honest, I have never seen anyone in Turkey add milk or cream to their Turkish coffee.
A cup of Turkish Coffee is photographed from the front view.

Almost eight years after her passing, when I close my eyes and think about my mother today, I picture her with a Turkish coffee cup in her hand, telling stories of whatever is happening on that particular day. Though I want to continue our family tradition every opportunity I get, I know it will never be the same without her.

A cup of coffee photographed from the top view with chocolate and water on the side

Frequently Asked Questions:

What kind of coffee/roast should I buy to make Turkish Coffee?

I have a few readers asked me if Starbucks’ coffees would work if they were to ask the barista to grind it as Turkish coffee. To be quite honest, I have never tried this, but I do not think so. What I know for sure (and the one I recommend) is Kurukahveci Mehmet Efendi (affiliate link). This is the coffee that I use (and grew up drinking) when I make my Turkish coffee.

Do I need that special pot (cezve or ibrik) to make Turkish coffee?

The answer is, it depends. I recommend getting it as (1) it is a tradition to cook Turkish coffee in a cezve and (2) cooking it in a cezve will give you the thick foam (more in this below) on top. With that being said, if you are not concerned with those two things, you can make our coffee in a very small saucepan.
I have one similar to this Copper Turkish Coffee Pot (affiliate link) and have been using it for years.

How do you get that thick foam on top?

This is a much-debated subject and you might get different answers if you asked different people. Below steps were what my mother taught me:

  • Once you mix water, coffee and sugar (if using), give it a quick mix but do not overmix it. Since you are cooking it in a very small pot (cezve), as it boils it will mix itself. I know that it is very tempting to want to mix it but resist the urge.
  • Once you pour your first pour, then you can give it a mix because the thick foamy part should already be in the cup.
  • As you pour your second, be sure to pour very slowly to not break the foam.

What if I am making Turkish coffee for multiple people with different sugar preferences?

If this is the case, you can do one of two things. First, you can make them in different pots, but for that, you would have to have more than one cezve.

Second, you can start making it with no sugar, pour the first pour to all the cups and then add in the sugar in the second pour.

For example: Let’s say I making Turkish coffee for 2 of my guests. First, start with the person who wants his sade (with no sugar) and then continue with the second person who wants his orta (1-2 teaspoon sugar). Below are the steps I would follow to make them at the same time in one pot (cezve):

  • Start by cooking water and coffee for 2 servings with no added sugar
  • Pour your first pour halfway into two coffee pots.
  • Boil the second pour and fill up the first serving with no sugar.
  • Then add in sugar into the pot, mix it, and bring it to a boil before you top off the second serving. Since Turkish coffee is pretty thick and served in such a small cup, it will have enough sweetness.

Where did you get the blue cups in the photos?

I borrowed those cups from a friend of mine. They were a gift to her from her husband. He purchased them from Pasabahce many years ago. I am not sure if they are still selling them, but since this was asked more than once I thought I can answer it here.

Where can I find Turkish Coffee cups?

If you ever visit Turkey and most other nearby countries, you can find a variety of options for Turkish coffee cups. However, if that is not possible you can easily find them online. Additionally, you can use espresso cups. They are a little larger but they would do the job.
Here is a set (affiliate link) you can use to make both types of coffees.

What is Turkish Coffee reading (fortune-telling)? Do you believe it?

It is a tradition that after you finish your coffee, you turn your cup upside down and let it cool down so that someone else can “read your cup”. This is a fun tradition, where someone (who is talented enough to make up stuff) looks into the cup and tries to guess your future based on the shapes of the coffee’s residue that stuck on the walls of your cup. If you are a believer of this kind of stuff, it could be quite entertaining.

My mom was one of those people, who would read people’s cups just for the fun of it. I no longer believe in such readings, but when I was a teenager and was falling in love with a different guy every week, I remember drinking a lot of Turkish coffee and begging her to read my cup to see if “my new found love” is going to ask me out any time soon. ๐Ÿ™‚

A cup of Turkish Coffee and pot are photographed from the front view
Print

How to Make Turkish Coffee At Home

Learn How To cook, brew and make Turkish Coffee at home from the way I learned from my mother with step-by step how-to photos along with the answers to frequently asked questions. 
Course Drink
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 servings

Ingredients

  • 3 Turkish coffee cup-sized cups of cold filtered water 1 1/2 cup per cup
  • 2 heaping tablespoons Turkish Coffee ground
  • Sugar – as requested

Instructions

  • Place the sugar (if desired), water, and Turkish coffee in metal Turkish coffee pot (Cezve).
  • Using a small spoon, stir briefly until just combined and place pot on stovetop.
  • Slowly bring coffee mixture to a boil over medium heat. This will take 3-4 minutes, so keep a close watch.
  • As the coffee warms, you will see a dark foam building up. Closer to it coming to a boil, using a teaspoon, transfer some of the foam into each of your two Turkish coffee cups. Return coffee pot to stovetop.
  • As coffee comes to a boil, pour half of the coffee into the cups, over the foam.
  • Return coffee pot to stovetop and boil the remaining coffee for an additional 15-20 seconds and pour the rest in to the coffee cups to the rim.
  • Serve with water and Turkish delight.

Video

Notes

What if I am making Turkish coffee for multiple people with different sugar preferences?

If this is the case, you can do one of two things.
First, you can make them in different pots, but for that, you would have to have more than one cezve.
Second, you can start making it with no sugar, pour the first pour to all the cups and then add in the sugar in the second pour.
For example: Let’s say I making Turkish coffee for 2 of my guests. First, start with the person who wants his sade (with no sugar) and then continue with the second person who wants his orta (1-2 teaspoon sugar). Below are the steps I would follow to make them at the same time in one pot (cezve):
  • Start by cooking water and coffee for 2 servings with no added sugar
  • Pour your first pour halfway into two coffee pots.
  • Boil the second pour and fill up the first serving with no sugar.
  • Then add in sugar into the pot, mix it, and bring it to a boil before you top off the second serving. Since Turkish coffee is pretty thick and served in such a small cup, it will have enough sweetness.

Nutrition

Sodium: 2mg

The post How to Make Turkish Coffee appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-turkish-coffee/feed/ 198
Watermelon Avocado Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/watermelon-avocado-and-mint-salad-with-feta-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/watermelon-avocado-and-mint-salad-with-feta-cheese/#comments Fri, 22 Jun 2018 14:50:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3625 I think we can all agree that one cannot talk about the perfect summer salad recipe and forget to mention this Watermelon Avocado Salad. While the combination of sweet watermelon and creamy avocado by itself is out of this world delicious, the addition of feta cheese and fresh mint leaves takes it to a whole new level. I may even go as far as to tell you that this is...

The post Watermelon Avocado Salad with Feta and Mint appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I think we can all agree that one cannot talk about the perfect summer salad recipe and forget to mention this Watermelon Avocado Salad. While the combination of sweet watermelon and creamy avocado by itself is out of this world delicious, the addition of feta cheese and fresh mint leaves takes it to a whole new level.

I may even go as far as to tell you that this is the best watermelon salad recipe in the world. Not just because it is made with just a few ingredients and takes less than 15 minutes to put it all together, but also because I can’t think of any other salad that embodies the best that summer produce has to offer.

Watermelon Avocado Salad recipe topped off with microgreens

A combination of Mexican and Mediterranean flavors, this fresh watermelon salad is a great way to cool off during the hot summer days. Just like my Avocado Mango Salad, Peach and Avocado Salad, and Quinoa Avocado Salad, it is easy to make with just a few ingredients you probably already have in your fridge.

Ingredients:

To make this avocado watermelon salad, you will need ripe avocado, ripe watermelon, a small red onion, fresh mint leaves, and crumbled feta cheese.

For the salad dressing, you will need freshly squeezed lime juice, olive oil, salt and black pepper.

Watermelon Feta Salad ingredients

Substitutions and Variations:

  • Lemon juice: If you do not have lime juice, you can use lemon juice instead.
  • Balsamic vinegar: A splash of balsamic vinegar would be a great addition to the dressing. However, you can also use my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette recipe as the dressing here.
  • Red Onion: While thinly sliced fresh onions work very well here, if you have some, you can swap them with pickled onions. I especially love my Mexican pickled onions in this salad as they pair perfectly with the sweet watermelon.
  • Cheese: I took some inspiration from my Mediterranean roots and used feta cheese, but crumbled goat cheese, fresh mozzarella, or torn burrata would all work in this watermelon salad with avocado.
  • Cucumber: If you have it, you can also add in a sliced English cucumber to make it even more wholesome.
  • Fresh Basil: You can swap fresh basil with mint here, especially if you use fresh mozzarella instead of feta.
Watermelon Mint Salad served with oil on the side

How To Make Watermelon Feta Mint Salad with Avocados

This easy summer salad recipe has three folds.

  1. The Lime Vinaigrette: Made with only 4 ingredients, the salad dressing is made by whisking olive oil with freshly squeezed lime juice and salt and pepper. As I mentioned earlier, you can substitute lime with lemon juice. Both options pair beautifully with the fresh mint and watermelon flavors.
  2. The Salad: The “salad” portion of the recipe is made with cubed watermelon, ripened avocado, thinly sliced red onion, and crumbled feta. If I am being honest, my mother’s version of this watermelon salad did not include avocado or lime.
  3. Assemble: Once you have your salad ingredients and vinaigrette ready, all you have to do is to toss them together. To do so, place cubed watermelon and avocado in a large bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss. Top it off with crumbled feta cheese and garnish with mint leaves.

Whether you serve it for a quick lunch for yourself or for your next summer party, I am confident that this watermelon feta and mint salad recipe is the best one out there.

How To Make Ahead & Store:

Want to serve this watermelon salad at your next family gathering? Follow my notes below on how to make it ahead, and if you have any leftovers, how to store them to enjoy the next day:

  • To Make Ahead: You can make this salad a day in advance. Though if you do so, I recommend mixing the dressing, feta cheese, and the rest of the salad ingredients right before serving.
  • To Store leftovers: If you have leftovers, feel free to place them in an airtight container and store them in the fridge. They should still be good on the next day.

What To Serve With Watermelon Salad?

While this watermelon salad with feta and mint makes a great summer lunch when served by itself, I think it is also the perfect summer side dish to serve with main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite recipes to serve it with:

Watermelon and Mint Salad served with avocado on the side

Expert Tips:

Here are a few tips to help you get the best results as you make this watermelon feta mint salad recipe:

  • Bite-sized chunks: Cut your watermelon into small bite-sized cubes that are equal in size. Or, if you have one, use a melon baller to cut out small balls.
  • Chill before serving: If you have time, I recommend letting it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so that the flavors will have some time to marinade, but it will still be delicious if you don’t have the time.
  • Use a large salad bowl: Since there are very few ingredients and both watermelon and avocado are quite fragile, tossing them in a large mixing bowl is easier than having to do it in a small bowl. This way, you can easily mix them without bruising the fruit.

If you like this recipe, you might also like:

Need more inspiration to up your salad game? Check out all our easy salad recipes on the blog.

If you try this Watermelon and Avocado Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Watermelon Avocado Salad Recipe
Print

Watermelon Avocado Salad Recipe

Watermelon Avocado Salad with Feta and Mint – A Mediterranean classic made with just a few ingredients and ready in less than 15 minutes. This watermelon salad is the perfect summer salad that can also be served as a side dish.
Course Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 248kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad

  • 4 cups watermelon in 1-inch cubes
  • 1 ripe avocado cut into small slices or cubes
  • 1/2 red onion thinly sliced
  • 1/2 cup fresh mint chopped
  • 1/2 cup feta cheese crumbled

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon coarse sea salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • For the salad: Place watermelon, avocado, red onion slices, and mint in a large salad bowl.
  • To make the dressing: Whisk together olive oil, lime juice, salt and pepper.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss to combine.
  • If you have the time, cover it with stretch film and let it marinade in the fridge for 30 minutes*.
  • When ready to serve, sprinkle crumbled feta cheese on top.

Video

Notes

  • The resting time is optional. If you are short on time, you can serve it right away.
  • To Make Ahead: You can make this salad a day in advance. If you do so, I recommend mixing the dressing, feta cheese, and the rest of the salad ingredients right before serving.
  • To Store leftovers: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container and store them in the fridge. They should still be good on the next day.

Nutrition

Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 798mg | Potassium: 478mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1256IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 126mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was originally published in 2014. It has been updated with some additional helpful information in July 2021.

The post Watermelon Avocado Salad with Feta and Mint appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/watermelon-avocado-and-mint-salad-with-feta-cheese/feed/ 20
Mediterranean-Style Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Sat, 28 Apr 2018 21:49:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 Mediterranean Style Green Beans Recipe – Deliciously tender green beans cooked with onions, tomatoes, and garlic and drizzled with yogurt dressing. Today I come to you with a true Mediterranean-style dish. If I were to translate from its original Turkish name, it would be Green Beans made with Olive Oil. Even though I thought about naming it that way, for some reason it sounded more relatable when I called it...

The post Mediterranean-Style Green Beans appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Mediterranean Style Green Beans Recipe – Deliciously tender green beans cooked with onions, tomatoes, and garlic and drizzled with yogurt dressing.

Mediterranean Style Green Beans recipe served with a cooked onion in the middle

Today I come to you with a true Mediterranean-style dish. If I were to translate from its original Turkish name, it would be Green Beans made with Olive Oil. Even though I thought about naming it that way, for some reason it sounded more relatable when I called it the Mediterranean-Style Green Beans.

I think the best way to interpret this dish to American cuisine would be to call it a cold green bean salad. With that being said, you can eat it warm or cold. It is totally a personal preference.

Cold green bean salad recipe topped off with garlic yogurt

So what makes this dish Mediterranean?

I am sure there is a scientific or historical answer to this question if you were to ask it to a culinary historian. But for someone like me, who spent all her childhood years in a Mediterranean country, this dish is the epitome of how we ate during the hot and long summer days of Turkey.

If you have been around that part of the world, you would know that during the summer months it gets so hot that most people prefer not to eat dishes that are served warm. Instead, they prefer lighter, refreshing dishes that can also be served cold.

And I bet you money, during this time of the year if you were to randomly pick a house in the Mediterranean region and look into their fridge, you would find a version of this dish.

Easy green bean salad is being drizzled with yogurt dressing

How to make this recipe?

The process of making this Mediterranean Green Bean Recipe has 2 parts.

First, you sautee onions in a little bit of olive oil. Then add in all the other ingredients, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil. Let it simmer for 25-30 minutes until green beans are cooked but still tender.

Second, while the beans are cooking prepare the yogurt sauce. The recipe you see for the yogurt dressing you see below is a take on my Greek Yogurt Salad Recipe. To make it, place everything in a bowl and give it a whisk. It is that simple.

I highly recommend that you do not skip the yogurt sauce on top to truly experience the Mediterranean- Style way of eating this green bean dish.

easy green bean salad

The secret ingredient in this green bean salad, which- in my opinion- is the reason why it tastes so good, is sugar. A couple of teaspoons of sugar you add at the beginning bring out the sweetness of the vegetable while masking the tanginess that you would experience if you were to not add sugar.

Mediterranean Style Green Beans

The best part about the technique used in this cold green bean salad is that you can use it to make a similar dish with other vegetables like zucchinis, celery roots, leeks, etc. that are in abundance during the summer months.

I know that a lot of people make classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans, Garlic Butter Green Beans, Gluten-free Green Bean Casserole, but I hope you give this version a try.

Easy Green bean salad placed on a plate and photographed from the front view.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

Mediterranean Style Green Beans recipe image
Print

Mediterranean-Style Green Beans

Mediterranean Style Green Beans Recipe - Delicious tender green beans cooked with onions, tomatoes, and garlic and drizzled with yogurt dressing. A great Mediterranean inspired dish that you can make when green beans are in season.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 283kcal

Ingredients

For the Green Beans:

  • 2 pounds green beans
  • 2 + 1 medium sized onion divided
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 14 ounces can tomatoes diced
  • 2 teaspoons salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 3-4 teaspoons granulated sugar
  • ¼ cup drinking water
  • a couple of sprigs of fresh dill

For the Yogurt Sauce:

  • 3 cloves of garlic pressed through a garlic press or minced finely
  • 1 cup plain whole milk or 2% yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¾ teaspoons salt

Instructions

  • Trim both ends of green beans by cutting them ¼- ½ inches. Rinse under running water, drain, and set aside.
  • Finely chop 2 of the onions. Peel the other one and leave it as a whole.
  • Heat the oil in a large Dutch oven (or any heavy bottom pan) in medium heat.
  • Add in the onion, and stirring occasionally, cook until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the paste, diced tomatoes, salt, black pepper, sugar, and water.
  • Add in the green beans. Give it a gentle stir making sure everything is homogenously distributed in the pan.
  • Place the reserved one onion on the top and put the lid on. Let it come to a boil and turn down to heat to medium-low and cook until the beans are tender, 35-45 minutes. Make sure to give it a gentle stir a couple of times during the cooking process.
  • To make the yogurt sauce: Whisk everything in a bowl, taste for seasoning, and add if necessary.
  • To serve: Place the green beans on a plate and top it off with yogurt sauce and some fresh dill.

Nutrition

Calories: 283kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 1848mg | Potassium: 1055mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 1976IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 214mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Mediterranean-Style Green Beans appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 8
Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatball-potato-bake/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatball-potato-bake/#comments Sat, 27 Jan 2018 04:32:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16075 It is hard to believe that it has been over 5 years since the last time I visited Turkey. The plan was to go last summer, but life happened and I couldn’t make the trip. I plan on going this summer, but between my work and personal commitments, I still don’t know if I can commit to a few weeks of being away. As you can imagine, I miss my...

The post Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is hard to believe that it has been over 5 years since the last time I visited Turkey. The plan was to go last summer, but life happened and I couldn’t make the trip. I plan on going this summer, but between my work and personal commitments, I still don’t know if I can commit to a few weeks of being away.

A half eaten Turkish Meatball Potato Bake is photographed from the

As you can imagine, I miss my family, friends, the house that I grew up in, and of course, the food. In the meantime, I am keeping in touch with my loved ones through Skype and the food via a few of my favorite YouTubers from Turkey.

A woman is photographed from the top view as she is getting ready to place a plate of Turkish meatball potato bake.

Speaking of YouTubers, I am currently obsessed with Refika’nin Mutfagi. She is a Turkish chef with a cooking show on one of the national channels in Turkey. She also has a YouTube channel with the same name, where she teaches her viewers how to cook all the while (mostly) making some of the classic Turkish recipes that stood the test of time.

Last year, she shared the recipe for this Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes with the ingredients found in the US supermarkets, but now I am ready to show you how to make it.

About This Meatball Potato Bake Recipe:

Before I talk about the details of the recipe, I want to be honest and upfront about the fact that this recipe requires some advance preparation. It is by no means difficult to make, but you would have to plan ahead and set aside ample time to make it.

The process of making this recipe has two folds:

First – Prep Your Turkish Meatballs Mixture:

I have already published a whole blog post and a quick video on how to make Turkish Meatballs. Feel free to visit that post to get the recipe and read through my tips and tricks. I recommend prepping the meatball mixture (without rolling the balls) a day in advance and keeping it in the fridge until you are ready to assemble this dish. Doing so will not only help you save on time, but also allow the ingredients to mingle and bring out the flavors in them.

Second – Prep the potatoes (also The Best Potatoes to Use for Baked Meatballs):

After several tries, I found that Yukon Gold potatoes deliver the best results for this recipe. On my first try, I used Russet potatoes. Sadly, even after an hour and half into baking in the oven, they were not cooked. On the other hand, Yukon Gold potatoes delivered a smooth, almost buttery texture that matched beautifully with the meatballs.

Additionally, as you are getting your potatoes, I recommend hand picking them to make sure that they are similar in size. This way, once they are arranged in the baking dish, they will cook evenly and have a uniformed look.

As you are slicing the potatoes, be sure to cut them as equally as possible. I sliced mine in ½-inch thick slices. For the 10-inch baking dish I used, I used 17 slices in the outer section and 4 slices in the middle section. Since I wanted it to look aesthetically pleasing and food photography-worthy, I didn’t use the smaller pieces. Rather, I cut them into small cubes and placed them in a plastic bag to use them for later.

A freshly baked Turkish meatball potato bake is photographed right after it came out of the oven from the top view.

The Toppings and the Tomato Sauce:

Once you assemble the meatball and potatoes, you top them off with sliced fresh tomatoes, minced garlic, and peppers. Next, you drizzle it with ¾ cup of tomato sauce and water mixture. On my first few tries, I used more of this liquid mixture and ended up with the juices at the bottom of my oven. I know that it is tempting to put more liquid in there, but it is important to know that the meatballs will also release their juices as they bake.

The last touch is a few tablespoons of cubed butter. My biggest advice to you is to not skip this step as I think butter is the killer touch that takes this dish to the next level.

How Long Do You Bake Meatballs in the Oven?

Once you have your meatballs and potatoes assembled and topped off with all the goodies, cover it first with parchment paper and then with aluminum foil. Doing so will help bake everything evenly without burning the meatballs and potatoes. After 55 minutes in a preheat 450 F degree oven, remove them to brown the top of the dish in the last 20 minutes.

Now, I know that it takes a long time. And to be honest, one of the reasons why I made this several tries was to find a quicker way to bake this dish. I tried thinner slices of potatoes and meatballs as well as other types of potatoes. However, none of my trials gave me quicker results. In the end, I had to accept the fact that good things take time.

Two bowls of Turkish meatball potato bake are photographed from the top view.

Tips On Making It Ahead and Freezing:

I hope you agree that this is an impressive dish to serve when you are entertaining. If you are planning to serve it to your guests, you can assemble the meatballs and potatoes in advance, cover it tightly with plastic wrap, and keep it in the fridge a day in advance or freeze a week or two before you are ready to serve.

If you choose to freeze, let it thaw overnight in the fridge a day before. On the day of, simply top it with the toppings, drizzle it with the tomato sauce-water mixture, and bake as directed.

Other Dinner Recipes You Might Like:

Turkish Meatball Potato Bake is photographed from the top view before it goes into the oven.
Print

Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes

Recipe for Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes Sliced Yukon Gold potatoes lined with Turkish meatballs, topped off with peppers, tomatoes, garlic, parsley, drizzled with tomato sauce, and baked in the oven for perfection. A crowd pleaser that is also esthetically pleasing to the eye. This recipe is adapted (with changes) from Refika'nin Mutfagi's Patates Kofte Dizme recipe.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 269kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 serving of Turkish Meatballs
  • 5-6 medium size Yukon Gold potatoes* washed under called water (no need to peel)
  • 2 teaspoon kosher salt divided
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ cup peppers sliced thinly
  • 3 cloves of garlic minced
  • ½ cup of Italian parsley chopped plus more as garnish at the end
  • 2 tablespoons butter cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup tomato sauce
  • ¼ cup water

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 450 F degrees.
  • Prep your Turkish meatballs as directed in the recipe. Roll them into balls. For a 10-inch plate that is 2-inches wide, you will need 21 meatballs.
  • Slice each potato into 1/2 -inch thick slices. Season each slice with 1 1/2 teaspoons of kosher salt.
  • Place a slice of potato in the palm of your hand and put a meatball on top. Shape the meatball in a way that will be similar to the size of the potato. Place it on a large plate and continue with the rest of the potato slices and meatballs.
  • Arrange the potato slices and meatballs like I did in the video above, starting from the outer corners and ending in the middle. For a 10-inch plate, you should have 17 meatballs+potatoes and 3-4 in the middle.
  • Garnish with cherry tomatoes, peppers, garlic, and parsley. Spread cubed butter on top.
  • Mix tomato sauce, water, and rest of the salt in a cup. Pour the mixture over the meatballs and potatoes.
  • Cover it first with parchment paper and then with aluminum foil. Bake in the preheated oven for 55 minutes. Then remove the parchment paper and aluminum foil and bake for another 20 minutes.
  • Sprinkle it with more parsley and serve.

Video

Notes

  • The dish that I used is an oven-proof 10-inch pie dish that is 2 inches deep.
  • Be sure to pick potatoes that are similar in size.
  • For freezing instructions please read the blog post.
  • The timing listed above doesn’t reflect the time it requires to prep the meatballs.

Nutrition

Calories: 269kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 345mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 195IU | Vitamin C: 49mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Oven Baked Meatballs and Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatball-potato-bake/feed/ 38
Turkish Meatballs {VIDEO} https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatballs/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatballs/#comments Mon, 22 Jan 2018 23:17:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15990 My mother was a working mom. For all of her adult life, she went to work at 8 in the morning and came back at 6 each evening. Every day, after she walked into the house, she put on her apron and called me into the kitchen so that we could start cooking together. It was my favorite time of the day. She was the chef and I was the...

The post Turkish Meatballs {VIDEO} appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
My mother was a working mom. For all of her adult life, she went to work at 8 in the morning and came back at 6 each evening. Every day, after she walked into the house, she put on her apron and called me into the kitchen so that we could start cooking together. It was my favorite time of the day. She was the chef and I was the apprentice.

A bowl filled with Turkish Meatballs and yogurt tahini sauce placed on a marble surface and photographed from the top view.

In my younger years, I was responsible for salads. But once I reached my teenage years, she taught me how to make some of the more complicated dishes. This recipe for Turkish meatballs, or as we call them kofte, was the first grown-up dish I learned from her. Even now, many years later, every time I make these the smell that fills my kitchen reminds me of those magical days of my childhood.

About This Turkish Meatballs Recipe:

If you have ever been to Turkey, you know that Turks love their meatballs. It is our version of a go-to weeknight dinner, as it is quick and easy to make and requires only a few ingredients.

Now, you might look at the recipe below and tell me that there are more than “just a few ingredients” – and you would be right. Though traditional Turkish meatballs are made with only ground beef, onion, stale bread, egg, salt and pepper, my mother would also always add garlic, cumin, and parsley. And so, I follow in her footsteps.

Ingredients for Turkish Meatballs are photographed from the top view.
Ingredients for Turkish Meatballs are placed in a bowl and photographed from the top view.

A Few Tips and Tricks For The Best Turkish Meatballs:

– I used 85% lean and 15% fat Organic ground beef. However, if you have a butcher who can ground it fresh for you, I recommend adding a little bit more fat. Ideally, 80% lean and 20% fat.

– In much the same way that Italians typically make their meatballs, you can mix 50% ground beef with 50% ground lamb for even more flavor.

A woman is photographed from the front view as she is mixing the ingredients for Turkish Meatballs.
Rolled Turkish Meatballs placed on a sheet pan are photographed from the top view.

– When I set out to make this recipe, I made a phone call to my mom’s best friend just for her to refresh my memory as I wanted make sure I was not missing anything. She told me that I should also use a little bit of baking soda to help them keep their shape, make them tender, and help them rise as they cook. She was right.

– After you mix all of the ingredients together, be sure to let it sit for a few hours. If you have time, allow the mixture to sit overnight in the fridge. The extra time spent in the fridge allows the ingredients to mingle and bring out the flavors that take these to the next level.

A plate full of yogurt tahini sauce and Turkish meatballs are photographed from the front view.
Two bowls filled with yogurt tahini sauce and Turkish meatballs garnished with pomegranate seeds and pine nuts.

– You can also do what my mother used to do, which is: Make a big batch, shape it into balls, layer them in between parchment papers in airtight containers, and freeze them for up to 2 months. A day before you are ready to serve, let them thaw in the fridge, and cook as directed.

– As you can see in the video, I used a grill pan, but you can also use a cast-iron skillet or better yet, come summer time, grill them outside.

– The trick to prevent them from burning is to turn them every few minutes and gently press them with the back of a spatula as they cook. This way, both the inside and the outside of the meatballs will cook evenly. As in all meat dishes, after they are cooked, cover them with aluminum foil, and let them sit for a few minutes to make sure that all of their juices will remain in the meat.

– I served my Turkish Meatballs with a dollop of Tahini Yogurt Sauce, but you can serve them with, pretty much, any starch as you like: Mashed potatoes, rice, pasta, quinoa, etc.

If you liked this Turkish Meatballs kofte recipe you might also like

Other Turkish recipes you might also like:

 

Turkish Meatballs on a bed of tahini yogurt sauce
Print

Turkish Meatballs Kofte Recipe

Growing up in Turkey, Turkish Meatballs were a favorite in our house. Made with only a few ingredients, these spicy meatballs are my go-to recipe whenever I miss home. 
Course Dinner
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 40 minutes
Servings 15 meatballs
Calories 118kcal

Ingredients

For The Turkish Meatballs

  • 1 medium-size onion peeled
  • 1 pound ground beef 85% lean 15% fat, preferably freshly ground & organic
  • 3/4 cup bread crumbs
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • 1 egg
  • 1 teaspoon cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • ¼ cup fresh Italian parsley chopped (optional)

To Serve (optional for 4 servings)

  • 1 cup Tahini Yogurt Sauce
  • 2 tablespoons pine nuts
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate arils
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Using a box shredder or a food processor, shred the onion. Pass it through a strainer to remove its juices.
  • Transfer onion to a large bowl. Add in the ground beef, bread crumbs, garlic, egg, cumin, baking soda, salt and pepper. If using, add in the Italian parsley into the bowl.
  • Use your hands to thoroughly mix. I usually mix it for 5-7 minutes to ensure that all the ingredients are thoroughly mixed. Cover it with stretch film and place in the fridge for 2 hours or, if possible, let it sit overnight.
  • Divide meatballs into 15 portions (like seen in the video and/or in the photo above)  and roll each portion into a small ball. Each ball should be somewhere between 2 ½ or 3 tablespoons. Lightly flatten each ball in the palm of your hands. Continue with the rest of the meat.
  • Heat 1 tablespoon olive oil in a 12-inch grill or cast iron pan until it is shimmering hot.
  • Add in the meatballs and cook for 7-8 minutes, turning them several times as they cook to prevent them before burning.  Use a spatula to lightly press as they cook.
  • If you have a smaller pan, you might have to do this in two batches.
  • Transfer cooked meatballs into a platter, cover with aluminum foil, and let it sit 5 minutes before serving.
  • If you prefer to serve like I did, spread a dollop of Tahini Yogurt Sauce at the bottom of a plate and add 3 meatballs in the middle. Garnish it with pine nuts, pomegranate arils, and chopped fresh parsley.

Video

Notes

  • These meatballs freeze very well. Simply, make a big batch, shape it into balls, layer them in between parchment papers in airtight containers, and freeze them for up to 2 months. A day before you are ready to serve, let them thaw in the fridge, and cook as directed.
  • As you can see in the video, I used a grill pan, but you can also use a cast iron skillet or better yet, come summer time, grill them outside.
  • The trick to prevent them from burning is to turn them every few minutes and gently press them with the back of a spatula as they cook. This way, both the inside and the outside of the meatballs will cook evenly. As in all meat dishes, after they are cooked, cover them with aluminum foil, and let them sit for a few minutes to make sure that all of their juices will remain in the meat.
  • I served my Turkish Meatballs with a dollop of Tahini Yogurt Sauce, but you can serve them with, pretty much, any starch as you like: Mashed potatoes, rice, pasta, quinoa, etc.
  • The nutritional data below does not include the calories coming from the Tahini Yogurt Sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 118kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 239mg | Potassium: 128mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 123IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Turkish Meatballs {VIDEO} appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-meatballs/feed/ 30
Tahini Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-yogurt-sauce/#comments Fri, 19 Jan 2018 22:20:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16017 Lately, we have been roasting vegetables and serving them with creative and different sauces to make them interesting. So far, in addition to my favorite tzatziki sauce, Greek yogurt ranch dip, and dill yogurt sauce, this tahini yogurt sauce is a winner. I think tahini (aka sesame paste) is a magical ingredient in that it provides both a nutty and hearty flavor when it is added into dishes. And it...

The post Tahini Yogurt Sauce appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Lately, we have been roasting vegetables and serving them with creative and different sauces to make them interesting. So far, in addition to my favorite tzatziki sauce, Greek yogurt ranch dip, and dill yogurt sauce, this tahini yogurt sauce is a winner.

A bowl of tahini yogurt sauce surrounded with cucumbers and radishes is photographed from the top view.

I think tahini (aka sesame paste) is a magical ingredient in that it provides both a nutty and hearty flavor when it is added into dishes. And it is one of those ingredients that pair well both with savory and sweet recipes. I keep a jar in my fridge all the time and use it on a daily basis.

Ingredients for tahini yogurt sauce are laid out and photographed from the top view.
All ingredients for tahini yogurt sauce are placed in a bowl and a woman is squeezing lemon into the bowl is photographed from the top view.

About This Greek Yogurt Tahini Sauce Recipe:

This tahini yogurt sauce comes together in less 10 minutes. However, depending on your consistency preference, it might require a little bit of planning ahead.

In the recipe below, I used plain Greek yogurt, which is thicker than regular yogurt. However, I like my tahini yogurt sauce thicker than the consistency of Greek yogurt. To get that texture, I lined a colander (placed in a bowl) with a cheesecloth and drained the juices of the yogurt in it overnight. In the morning, most of its juices were drained, giving me the consistency that I was looking for.

Of course, if you prefer a more watery texture, especially if you are using it as a salad dressing, feel free to skip the draining process.

A bowl of tahini yogurt sauce surrounded with cucumbers and radishes is photographed as they are placed on the table by a woman from the top view.

How To Use Yogurt Tahini Sauce:

In addition to using it to flavor roasted vegetables and salads, I use this tahini yogurt dressing as a dip to serve with fresh vegetables (like I did in the photos here). Also, it goes very well meat dishes, especially with lamb and ground beef.

Growing up, my mother would place a big spoonful of this sauce on a plate, place Turkish meatballs on top, and sprinkle it with roasted pine nuts, pomegranate seeds, and fresh parsley. She would also use this as a spread for lamb burgers and layer it with tomatoes and salad greens.

I topped my sauce off with pine nuts and pomegranate seeds, mostly because (1) I like the combination and (2) I wanted it to look good in the photos. However, if you are using it in any of the ways I mentioned above, you can serve this sauce without them.

More Healthy Salad Dressing Recipes

 

A bowl of tahini yogurt sauce surrounded with cucumbers and radishes is photographed from the top view.
Print

Tahini Yogurt Sauce

This Tahini Yogurt Sauce recipe is a healthy and versatile dressing worth adding to your repertoire. You can use this multifaceted sauce to add flavor to roasted vegetables, salads, meat dishes, and even as a dip to serve alongside crudités.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings (~ 1 1/4 cups)
Calories 101kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup full-fat Greek Yogurt
  • 3 tablespoons tahini stirred well
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until combined.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in more if you like.

Notes

  • If you prefer a thicker texture, you can line a colander (placed in a bowl) with cheesecloth, place yogurt in it, and let it drain overnight in the fridge. The consistency of the sauce made with the drained yogurt will be much thicker, making it perfect to use as a spread for burgers or as a dip to serve with fresh vegetables.
  • Like most yogurt based dressings, this sauce is best on the day it is made. However, if you keep in an airtight jar, it would still be good the next day. Be sure to give it a good shake before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 101kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 604mg | Potassium: 122mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Tahini Yogurt Sauce appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 20
One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-citrusy-winter-root-vegetables/ https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-citrusy-winter-root-vegetables/#comments Mon, 06 Feb 2017 20:30:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12335 My mother did not want me to come to the US. The year was 2002. I had recently graduated from college and returned home for a visit. I was at an age where we understood each other more than ever. I was her only child and we were each other’s best friend. Coming to the US was the hardest decision I ever made in my life. On one hand, I...

The post One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
My mother did not want me to come to the US. The year was 2002. I had recently graduated from college and returned home for a visit. I was at an age where we understood each other more than ever. I was her only child and we were each other’s best friend. Coming to the US was the hardest decision I ever made in my life.

One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables

On one hand, I was excited about my journey to America and what the future had in store, yet I felt guilty leaving her behind. The day before I left, we had a long conversation and she told me that if I ever felt I was not wanted or unhappy, I should immediately come home.

The journey from Istanbul was long, but the moment I set foot in New York City, I knew my life had changed forever. I was mesmerized with almost everything; tall buildings, crowded streets, beautiful stores, and all kinds of food and people. It was a whole new world that I had only seen in movies. Years went by feeling this way. I never got tired of what this country had to offer me and its people. It would be a lie if I told you that I didn’t have tough times. Believe me, I had my share of visa issues. However, I never felt I was not wanted or out of place. To me, the beauty of America was that life was hard for everyone, but we were all in this together. I always found someone to offer me a helping hand when needed. In the last 15 years, I made some of the best friendships of my life in this country. More importantly, I met the love of my life and married him here.

Ingredients for One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables

So I think you can understand why I am so baffled with everything that has happened in the last few weeks. I do not want this blog to be a place where I talk about my political views because I understand that we may have a difference of opinion and I am not here to expose you to my views. However, as an immigrant who has always felt welcomed, it saddens me to see a group of people banned entrance into the country because of their beliefs, especially after everything they had been through. I know America is better than this.

With the hopes of lightening the mood, today I am sharing my mother’s one-pot winter root vegetable dish. If you have been following me for a while, you know I believe in the healing power of food. I also believe that food makes us all come together, set aside our differences, and enjoy each other’s tastes and company.

A bowl of One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables with a spoon and a glass of lemon water and cut oranges
Ingredients for winter vegetables for the recipe

About this One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables Recipe:

If I were to translate the name of this dish from Turkish to English, it would be something like celery root cooked in olive oil. Growing up, it was a wintertime staple in our house. As the name suggests, winter’s popular root vegetables; celery root, potatoes, and carrots, are placed in a large pot, drizzled with olive oil and freshly squeezed orange juice and cooked until the vegetables are tender. Some people use lemon juice instead of orange juice, but I personally prefer orange juice because it is sweeter and I think it pairs beautifully with celery root. Plus, as you can see in the photos, I was able to get my hands on the sweetest pink Cara Cara oranges, which are my absolute favorite fruit ever.

Person serving Winter Root Vegetables in a casserole dish

During my childhood, my mother would make this on a Sunday and we’d eat it cold as a salad or a side dish throughout the week. After I married my American husband and served him this dish as my mother did, I learned that eating cold root vegetables even as a side dish could be a foreign concept for some people. If you feel the same way, feel free to warm it up in the microwave for a few minutes before serving.


I wrote this blog post as a part of a bloggers initiative, where we all shared our own #immigrantfoodstories. Below you will find a few of my favorite bloggers’ posts on the subject:

Honestly Yum: Lu Dan (Soy Eggs)
The Year In Food: Winter Squash Fritters
Eat This Poem: Immigrant Picnic
Floating Kitchen: Armenian Bulgur Parsley and Tomato Salad
Brooklyn Supper: Spelt Crust Apple Pandowdy
Kale & Caramel: Fatteh with Cumin Chickpeas & Tahini Yogurt
Fix Feast Flair: Beef Teriyaki
The Crepes of Wrath: Polish Apple Pie

One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables in a casserole dish
Print

One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables

This One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables is a Turkish vegan and gluten-free dish that my mother used to make during the winter months using celeriac, carrots, potatoes, and orange juice. It is a light side dish or a winter salad that you can serve both warm or cold.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 355kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 2 cloves of garlic peeled
  • 2 medium-sized celery root also called celeriac, (1 ½- 2 pounds in total) – peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 medium-sized potato peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 2 carrots peeled and cut into ½-inch pieces
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons good olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup fresh or frozen peas
  • ¼ cup fresh dill rinsed and coarsely chopped

Instructions

  • Place the onion, garlic, celery root, potato, and carrot in a large pan with a lid.
  • Drizzle it with the orange juice and olive oil. Stir in the sugar, salt, and pepper. Give it a large stir.
  • Cover and cook over medium heat for 20-25 minutes or until the celeriac and potatoes are cooked through.
  • Stir in the peas and cook for another 5-6 minutes.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Garnish it with fresh dill.
  • You can serve this dish immediately or let it come to room temperature and store in an airtight container in the fridge and serve cold as a side dish for the next 2-3 days.

Notes

If you prefer, you can also make this dish with lemon juice instead of orange juice. If you choose to do so, I recommend increasing the sugar to 2 tablespoons.

Nutrition

Calories: 355kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 645mg | Potassium: 1509mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 5661IU | Vitamin C: 73mg | Calcium: 184mg | Iron: 4mg
One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables: A vegan and gluten-free, one pot dish made with cooking together celery root, potatoes, and carrots with olive oil and orange juice.

The post One-Pot Citrusy Winter Root Vegetables appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-citrusy-winter-root-vegetables/feed/ 15
Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake https://foolproofliving.com/savory-feta-cheese-and-kalamata-olive-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/savory-feta-cheese-and-kalamata-olive-cake/#comments Thu, 13 Nov 2014 13:08:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4865 After my mother’s passing, her best friends became my best friends. Though I wish it was under different circumstances, I am glad I have them in my life. Sevil is one of those friends, and she is very near and dear to me. Though she lives in Turkey, she and I regularly have coffee dates over Skype, where we almost always talk about food and recipes. Lucky for me, she...

The post Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
After my mother’s passing, her best friends became my best friends. Though I wish it was under different circumstances, I am glad I have them in my life. Sevil is one of those friends, and she is very near and dear to me. Though she lives in Turkey, she and I regularly have coffee dates over Skype, where we almost always talk about food and recipes. Lucky for me, she is one of the best home cooks I know, and she is always available to help when I am in need.

A slice of Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake on a small plate

This Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake recipe belongs to her. It is one of her signature dishes that you can almost always find in her kitchen. I can even say that the smell of this cake while it is baking is the smell that welcomes you when you visit her house. However, for me, it is the smell of my childhood years spent with accompanying my mother to afternoon teatime gatherings with her friends.

A Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake in a baking dish on a napkin with 2 sparkling beverages and a basket on the side

I love this cake, not only because it reminds me back home, but also because it embodies the characteristics of a true Mediterranean savory teatime cake. If you have ever visited a country from that region, you would know how much they love a cup of afternoon tea accompanied with a savory (or sweet) cake.

Ingredients for Olive Cake

Growing up in Turkey, we were no different. Even at school, they would feed us with something similar as an afternoon snack.

Bowl of flour with a whisk and cracked eggs on the side

Making it is rather easy and quick. All you have to do is to mix the dry ingredients and wet ingredients together, add feta cheese, Kalamata olives, and fresh herbs, place it in an ovenproof dish, and sprinkle it with sesame seeds. After baking it in a low-heat setting for 45-55 minutes, you end up with a classic Mediterranean treat.

Ingredients for Savory Cake

Here, I must mention that even though it is still a moist cake, it has more of a dense texture than a fluffy one. It is incredibly delicious after it comes out of the oven. And if you keep it in an airtight container in the fridge, it keeps its freshness for at least 3 days.

Pre mix for Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake

After those 3 days, if you still have some leftovers, you can also cut it into small cubes and freeze them to use as croutons. When ready to use, simply place them on a baking sheet, bake at 350 degrees for 15-20 minutes, and add it as a garnish to soups.

Slices of Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake on 3 separate dishes and a beverage on the side

It goes especially great with soups that have tomato as basis. I think, using it as croutons is such an easy way to give a Mediterranean twist to an otherwise ordinary soup.

Single of Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake with a plate of olive cake in the background and 2 beverages
Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake
Print

Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake

This Feta and Kalamata Olive Cake is studded with briny olives and feta, scented with fresh herbs and sprinkled with sesame seeds. A one-bowl savory cake, this delicious recipe is perfect for a Mediterranean themed breakfast or brunch.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine Turkish
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 489kcal

Ingredients

  • 8.8 ounces all purpose flour
  • 2 1/2 teaspoons baking powder
  • 1/4 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon salt *
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 ounces feta cheese crumbled
  • 1/2 cup fresh parsley and/or dill chopped
  • 1/2 cup pitted Kalamata olives chopped
  • 4 stalks scallions both green and white parts chopped
  • 2 eggs at room temperature
  • 1/2 cup whole milk at room temperature
  • 3/4 cup yogurt at room temperature
  • 1/2 cup olive oil Vegetable spray
  • 1 tablespoon black and white sesame seeds

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
  • Spray an 8X11 oven-proof casserole dish with vegetable spray. Set aside.
  • Sift flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt and pepper in a bowl. Set aside.
  • Mix feta cheese, fresh parsley, olives, and scallions in a bowl. Set aside.
  • Whisk together the eggs, whole milk, yogurt, and olive oil in a bowl. Reserve 3 tablespoons of the egg mixture (we’ll use this to glaze the top of the cake later.).
  • Gradually mix in the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients just until combined.
  • Fold in the feta cheese mixture while making sure that it is equally distributed within the dough.
  • Transfer the mixture into the casserole dish. Equally spread the reserved 3 tablespoons of the egg mixture on top. Sprinkle it with sesame seeds.
  • Bake for 20 minutes in the preheated 350 degrees oven. And then turn down the heat to 325 degrees and bake for another 25-30 minutes, or until the top is golden and a toothpick inserted in the middle comes out with no crumbs.
  • Allow it to cool for at least 20 minutes before serving.

Notes

Note: Be sure to taste the olives and the feta cheese before adding the salt into flour mixture. If they are salty enough, you may omit adding additional salt.

Nutrition

Calories: 489kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 1267mg | Potassium: 218mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 847IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 390mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Savory Feta Cheese and Kalamata Olive Cake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/savory-feta-cheese-and-kalamata-olive-cake/feed/ 16
Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers {Vegan} https://foolproofliving.com/middle-eastern-inspired-stuffed-peppers/ https://foolproofliving.com/middle-eastern-inspired-stuffed-peppers/#comments Fri, 01 Aug 2014 12:44:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3949 For the last couple of months, my husband and I have been on a health kick. Initially, it was my idea to make minor changes to our diets for a healthier lifestyle. Dwight, on the other hand, just assumed it was another one of those things that I would get hyped up about initially, but would go away after my enthusiasm inevitably waned. But this was not one of those...

The post Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers {Vegan} appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
For the last couple of months, my husband and I have been on a health kick. Initially, it was my idea to make minor changes to our diets for a healthier lifestyle. Dwight, on the other hand, just assumed it was another one of those things that I would get hyped up about initially, but would go away after my enthusiasm inevitably waned. But this was not one of those things – this new habit seems to have stuck.

Day after day, I have been making these delicious AND healthy dishes like Cauliflower Risotto, Black Bean and Quinoa Tacos, and Savory Steel-Cut Oats to put in front of him.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

Over time, he has accepted that it is not a phase and has quietly come to enjoy these meals. While he’s never actually told me this, I think he has even started enjoying them more than the typical American comfort food type of dishes that he grew up eating.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

Recently, we watched the documentary Forks over Knives which is about how what we eat has a direct effect on our overall health, and how little changes that we make in our diet can result in a disease-free future. Obviously, this was nothing new to me, but for Dwight, it was an eye opener, and therefore very effective. He had already known about the importance of eating healthy, but seeing the results of studies over years of research and experiments put things in a much clearer perspective for him.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

I think by the end, more than anything, it made both of us to realize that it doesn’t take too much to make minor changes in our diet to get big results.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

So we decided that we would incorporate more of a plant-based diet with grains and beans into our lives. Instead of using dairy and oils to flavor things, we agreed to use spices, fresh herbs, nuts, and seeds.

Our goal is to do this 80% of the time. I mean, we don’t want to stop eating meat, dairy, or sugar completely, but we do want to make sure that we keep the consumption of these types of foods to a minimum or just save them for celebratory occasions.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

I must admit – it has been a work in progress, but overall, we both have been enjoying it. Of course, living on an island with very minimal distractions helps, but it has also been a lot fun for me to get creative with what we have access to.

These Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers are a part of our 80% diet. It is a dish that my mother would make during the summers when bell peppers were in abundance back home. It is made with a bulgur filling flavored with lots of onions, cinnamon, all spice, pine nuts, dried currents, and fresh herbs like basil, mint, and dill.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

I personally love this dish because (1) it reminds me of back home and (2) I find that the combination of flavors of cinnamon, all spice, pine nuts, and currants mixed with fresh herbs do an amazing job of turning otherwise boring bell peppers into a uniquely delicious summer dish. Not to mention it is filling, healthy, and vegan.

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers
Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers
Print

Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers {Vegan}

Recipe for Middle Eastern Inspired Vegan Stuffed Peppers filled with bulgur, fresh herbs, and currants. This is an easy and delicious stuffed pepper recipe you can make all year round.
Course Main Dish, Vegan
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 335kcal

Ingredients

  • 1/4 cup dried currants
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 3 medium sized onions chopped
  • 1/4 cup pine nuts
  • 1-14 ounces can tomato petite diced
  • 1 tablespoon all spice
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur rinsed
  • 1 1/4 cup water boiling water
  • 3-4 bell peppers washed, cut in half, and seeded
  • 1/4 cup fresh dill chopped (a little more as garnish)
  • 1/4 cup fresh mint chopped
  • 2 tablespoons basil chopped

Instructions

  • Place dried currants in a small bowl and pour 1/2 cup of boiling over it. Set aside.
  • Heat olive oil in a large pan over medium heat.
  • Add onions and pine nuts. Cook, stirring frequently, until they are translucent, 10-12 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomatoes, all spice, salt, pepper, and cinnamon. Cook until some of the juices of the tomatoes evaporate, 3-5 minutes.
  • Add in the bulgur and stir constantly until it is all mixed in with the vegetables and spices, 4-6 minutes.
  • Add the boiling water, turn down the heat to low, and put the lid on. Let it cook until all the liquid has been absorbed, 12-17 minutes.
  • Turn the heat off and let it rest (covered) for 10-15 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 Degrees.
  • Cover an ovenproof casserole or Pyrex dish with parchment paper.
  • Drain the currants.
  • Fluff the now-cooked bulgur with a fork, and gently stir in the currants, dill, mint, and basil.
  • Fill each half of the peppers with the filling and place it in the casserole dish.
  • Add 2 tablespoons of water at the bottom of the dish.
  • Cover it with aluminum foil and place it in the oven.
  • Bake for 30 minutes.
  • Then take off the aluminum foil, and bake for another 15-20 minutes or until the tops of the stuffed peppers turn to light brown.
  • When ready to serve, garnish fresh dill.

Notes

  • When buying bell peppers, I would recommend picking ones that are similar in size. The filling in this recipe is enough for 4-5 medium size bell peppers.
  • My pyrex dish was 8″x11″.
  • The reason why we put a couple of tablespoons of water and cover the peppers with foil is to ensure that they won’t dry during the baking process. The steam helps the peppers and the filling stay moist.

Nutrition

Calories: 335kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 612mg | Potassium: 657mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 3209IU | Vitamin C: 125mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 3mg
Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers

The post Middle Eastern Inspired Stuffed Peppers {Vegan} appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/middle-eastern-inspired-stuffed-peppers/feed/ 8
Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za’atar Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chickpea-farro-and-zaatar-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chickpea-farro-and-zaatar-salad/#comments Sun, 15 Jun 2014 18:32:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3410 There is something to be said about being very good at what you do. As a fairly new blogger, I must admit – I missed that feeling. All my pre-blogging life I worked as a hotelier and was told that I was good at it. In the direction I was going, I thought that I would end up being the General Manager of a luxury hotel and spend the rest of...

The post Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za’atar Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There is something to be said about being very good at what you do.

Woman holding a bowl of Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za'atar Salad

As a fairly new blogger, I must admit – I missed that feeling. All my pre-blogging life I worked as a hotelier and was told that I was good at it.

In the direction I was going, I thought that I would end up being the General Manager of a luxury hotel and spend the rest of my life working long hours in the hospitality industry. I hoped that all those years of working in a hotel eventually would pay off and award me with a successful career in the eyes of myself and others.
However, as it usually happens, life threw me a couple curve balls, which changed the direction of my life dramatically.

Ingredients for Chickpea Salad

First, we moved to an island where finding a job and continuing my career was not as easy as I had hoped. Second, I lost my mother suddenly to a heart attack.

Needless to say, under the current conditions of this new life, I was lost for awhile.

During this time, I spent countless hours doing the things that I had no time to do while I was working at a hotel. Simple things like reading a book on the beach, watching a TV show, or hanging out with my friends. With all the free time I had on my hands, I spent my days doing those things to occupy myself. Though it was fun in the beginning, after the first couple of months, it turned out that I was struggling with the feeling of being lost. Because, I later realized, I was addicted to the fast paced environment of the corporate life and was craving it.
It didn’t take me too long to come to the conclusion that, contrary to what most people may think, even the beautiful beaches of Virgin Gorda could get boring after a while.

I was in need of something to fill this empty space. Something that would bring meaning to my life…

Two scenes of ingredients for Za'atar Salad

Then the idea of blogging came about. At first I was hesitant, thinking that no one would want to read what I have to say. But I gave it a shot and stuck to it. I am glad I did.

This month marks the first year of Foolproof Living. With close to 130 recipes, lots of new friends that I have met through blogging, and a new appreciation for writing and photography, I feel like I have accomplished something. Something that is meaningful to me.

However, just as it is in every career, I know that there is so much to learn and there is a long road ahead of me.

Over the course of this year, I realized that I enjoyed photographing food as much as I enjoyed cooking it. It gave me such a feeling of accomplishment to hear from my friends, family, and readers that they love the photographs as much as they love the recipes.

To get better at it and educate myself, I read everything I could get my hands on, followed some of the most amazing food bloggers out there, and practiced as much as I could. However, after a year of practicing on my own, I felt like I needed a little direction and feedback from someone in the industry.

Therefore, my friend Christina’s visit to Virgin Gorda couldn’t have come at a better time for me.

Person pouring ingredients by hand into Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za'atar Salad

Christina is a professional traveling portrait and wedding photographer. In my opinion, she is one of those people who is very good at what she does.

We spent the whole of last week talking about lighting, composition, and telling a story through photography. Our time together gave me a different perspective that I hadn’t had before.

For instance, up until this week, I was scared of having negative space in my photography. I felt as though I had to fill every corner of the shot with something. Every photograph I took was carefully staged. In a way, it was not real.

Another example is that I was hesitant of including shadows, concerned that they would make my images look crowded or imperfect. I always used a reflector to light the food perfectly, ensuring that there were no shadows covering the food. Again, not real…

Person pouring feta cheese into Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za'atar Salad

Throughout the week, I learned that telling a story of how that dish came about is as important as photographing the end product staged in a perfect setting.

Christina and I made this Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro and Za’atar Salad together. Or, I should say, I made it and she photographed it as I was making it.

Through photography, we told the story of making our dinner, a salad made with healthy everyday ingredients typical of Mediterranean cuisine. She helped me understand how important it is that my readers know what goes into making a dish. Instead of staging the food on the table with a reflector in one hand and a diffuser in the other, she shot my hands as I was chopping and mixing the ingredients and holding the finished product in my hands.

Overhead view of Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za'atar Salad

As we photographed this delicious yet super simple salad, I felt liberated to know that what makes food photography so good is the story being told by showing the shadows, imperfections of the ingredients, and hands preparing the food.

After a week spent with a professional, I feel as though I have a better appreciation of photography and story telling through it. I am aware that it will take time for me to get to where I want to be, but I feel like I have an idea of the direction I have to follow to get there.

Person pouring ingredients by hand into Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za'atar Salad
Print

Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za’atar Salad

Chickpea Za’atar Salad with farro for a light and filling salad recipe you can make in no time. If you are into Mediterranean flavors and are in need of a healthy and wholesome salad recipe, you’ve come to the right place. This vegetarian farro chickpea salad is flavored with za’atar, feta cheese, and roasted veggies for a complete delicious meal for any day of the week.
Course Salad, Vegetarian Meals
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 410kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1/2 cups water
  • 1 cup farro rinsed and drained
  • 1 medium sized eggplant peeled and cut into small cubes
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil divided
  • 2-3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 14 oz. can chickpeas, drained and washed
  • 2 scallions chopped both green and white parts
  • 1 cup Kalamata olives pitted and chopped
  • 4-6 ripe tomatoes chopped
  • 1/4 cup Italian Parsley chopped
  • 3 tablespoons za’atar spice blend
  • coarse sea salt and black pepper
  • 1/2 cup feta cheese crumbled

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven 350 Degrees. Place eggplants on a baking sheet, drizzle with 1 tablespoon olive oil, sprinkle it with salt and pepper. Toss to mix. Roast for 35-40 minutes. Set aside to cool.
  • In the mean time, place water and 1 teaspoon salt into a medium size saucepan and bring to a boil. Stir in the farro. Turn the heat to low, and cook for 30-35 minutes or until it is chewy. Drain and set aside.
  • In a small mixing bowl make a quick vinaigrette by whisking 2-3 tablespoons of olive oil, lemon juice,1 teaspoon salt, and 1/4 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper.
  • In a large mixing bowl, place chickpeas, scallions, tomatoes, eggplant, farro, and fresh parsley. Drizzle the vinaigrette over.
  • Using your clean hands toss to combine. Top it off with feta cheese and sprinkle it with za’atar. Taste for seasoning and add if necessary.
  • Serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 410kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 754mg | Potassium: 490mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 205mg | Iron: 6mg
Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za'atar Salad

The post Mediterranean Chickpea, Farro, and Za’atar Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chickpea-farro-and-zaatar-salad/feed/ 17
Tahini Cookies with Pistachios https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/ https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/#comments Thu, 01 May 2014 10:40:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3058 It may come as a shock to you to hear that I had my first peanut butter and jelly sandwich when I first moved to the U.S. Even more shocking, I didn’t even know that such a combination existed. As I took the first bite of my very first peanut butter and jelly sandwich, the combination of sweet and salty flavors of peanuts and grape jelly tasted very familiar. You...

The post Tahini Cookies with Pistachios appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It may come as a shock to you to hear that I had my first peanut butter and jelly sandwich when I first moved to the U.S. Even more shocking, I didn’t even know that such a combination existed.

As I took the first bite of my very first peanut butter and jelly sandwich, the combination of sweet and salty flavors of peanuts and grape jelly tasted very familiar.

Tahini Cookies with Pistachios on a plate with more on a cooling rack with pistachios and a glass of chocolate milk on the side

You know why?? Because back home, in Turkey, I grew up eating the Middle Eastern version of peanut butter and jelly, tahini paste and grape molasses. Growing up, my mother would mix half a cup of tahini paste with a quarter cup of grape molasses and serve it as a spread over bread for breakfast.

Partially eating Tahini Cookie

This explains why, today when I serve tahini paste and grape molasses to our friends for breakfast they usually tell me that it tastes like peanut butter and jelly.

Another very Middle Eastern way of using tahini paste is to make helva. Helva is made up of mixing sugar, tahini paste and sometimes pistachios. It is a very popular dessert served after dinner with Turkish coffee, especially after a seafood meal.

These tahini cookies taste like somewhere between helva and a peanut butter cookie. With every bite you get to enjoy the earthy flavors of tahini complimented with a pistachio without being overly sweet.

When I first made these cookies, I baked the first batch without pistachios. After I tasted it, I felt like it needed something else to balance the sweetness and nuttiness. That something, I decided later, was some chopped pistachios. So I went ahead and added ¼ cup of chopped pistachios to the second half of the batter. They ended up tasting phenomenal but they did not look as good as the ones in the pictures. They did not retain their shape and looked like they are cracked.
In my second try, instead of using chopped pistachios I used one whole pistachio for each cookie. The result was just perfect. They tasted and looked very good.
Still, if you do not mind the way they look you can certainly add chopped pistachios.

Once you mix all the ingredients it is so easy to put it together.

Person holding dough for Tahini Cookies with Pistachios with pressed tahini cookie dough on a sheet pan

I used a tablespoon measure to ensure that they are all the same size. I rolled each cookie between the palms of my hands to make small balls, and placed them on a baking sheet.

Person assembling Tahini Cookies with Pistachios on a sheet pan

To make them look pretty, I used the spiked surface of my meat tenderizer and pushed them down lightly to flatten them.
Last but not least, I placed a whole pistachio in the middle of each cookie and gently pushed it down with my index finger.

Small plate of Tahini Cookies with Pistachios with a glass of chocolate milk and pistachios on the side

This batter makes 36 cookies. Since 18 cookies were more than enough for me and my husband, I placed the second batch (the whole dough) of the batter in the freezer. I defrosted it out on the kitchen counter 15 minutes before I was ready to bake them. They were just as good as the unfrozen version. So if you do not feel like baking them all at the same time, feel free to freeze the second half of the batter to bake for another time.

As long as they are kept in an airtight container, they taste fresh for 3 days. But, of course, that is never a problem in our house because between my husband and me, they don’t last more than a day.

Three Tahini Cookies with Pistachios with a glass of chocolate milk and pistachios on the side
Print

Tahini Cookies with Pistachios

Turkish Tahini Cookies with pistachios: A mix between shortbread and sugar cookie, these tahini cookies with pistachios are an additive melt in your mouth cookie. If you have never tried incorporating tahini in your cookie recipes, this easy cookie recipe is a great one to try
Course Dessert
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 17 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 36 servings
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 2/3 cup superfine sugar* (4.5 ounces)
  • 2/3 cup unsalted butter, at room temperature (5.3 ounces)
  • 1/2 cup tahini paste (3.9 ounces)
  • 1/2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 5 teaspoons heavy cream (0.85 fluid ounces)
  • 2 cups all-purpose flour + (1 1/2) tablespoon (in total 9.5 ounces)
  • 1/2 cup pistachios shelled

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 400 F degrees.
  • Line 2 baking sheets with parchment paper. Set aside.
  • Place sugar and butter in the bowl of a stand in mixer fitted with the paddle attachment. Mix them in medium speed for 1 minute.
  • While the mixer is running add tahini paste, vanilla, heavy cream, scraping down the bowl in the middle.
  • Turn down the speed to low and slowly add the flour.
  • Mix until combined. (You may need to scrape down the bowl a couple of times.)
  • Transfer it to the kitchen counter and knead it until smooth.
  • Using a tablespoon measure, pinch a 1-tablespoon piece and roll it in between your palms. Place it on the baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Continue to do this for the rest of the dough, spacing cookies 1.5 inches apart from one another.
  • Using the back of a fork (or the spiked surface of a meat tenderizer) push down the balls lightly to slightly flatten them.
  • Place a pistachio in the middle of each cookie and gently push down with your index finger.
  • Bake for 15-17 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Transfer the cookies on a wire rack as soon as they come out of the oven to stop the cooking.
  • Let them cool for 5-10 minutes and serve.

Notes

Note 1: : If you bake them in 2 batches, second batch bakes faster. So keep a close eye on it.[br]Note 2: : To make superfine sugar, I process same amount of granulated sugar in a food processor for a minute.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 41mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 125IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe is adapted from Ottolengi and Tamimi’s cookbook Jerusalem.

The post Tahini Cookies with Pistachios appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/feed/ 4